JP2023077344A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that allow a player to play a game comfortably while preventing the player from being infatuated with the game.SOLUTION: A game machine equipped with performance control means capable of controlling a performance related to a game includes: first counting means capable of counting the number of put-out game media, which is the number of game media put out in a predetermined period or the number of game media determined to be put out in the predetermined period; second counting means capable of counting the number of used game media, which is the number of game media used in the predetermined period; and game stop means capable of generating a game inexecutable state in which a game cannot be executed on the basis of the number of put-out game media and the number of used game media. When a value corresponding to a difference between the number of put-out game media and the number of used game media is within a predetermined range, the performance control means can display the value in display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines capable of executing games (eg, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-200013).

JP 2017-12359 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, there is room for improvement in terms of preventing players from becoming addicted to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that prevents a player from becoming addicted to the game and allows the player to play the game with peace of mind.

According to a representative aspect of the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with an effect control means capable of controlling game-related effects, the number of game media paid out during a predetermined period of time or the number of game media paid out during a predetermined period of time is determined. A first counting means capable of counting the number of payouts, which is the number of game media; a second counting means, capable of counting the number of uses, which is the number of game media used in the predetermined period; and the number of payouts and the number of uses. and a game stop means capable of generating a game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed based on, wherein the effect control means has a value corresponding to the difference between the payout number and the use number within a predetermined range. In this case, the value can be displayed on the display means.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a player from becoming addicted to the game and allows the player to play the game with peace of mind.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flowchart (part 1) showing a procedure of main processing; 10 is a flowchart (part 2) showing the procedure of main processing; 10 is a flowchart (part 3) showing a procedure of main processing; It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the microcomputer for a game. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a safety device information initialization process. 9 is a flow chart showing a procedure of performance display editing processing; 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of output processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gaming machine state check process. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a specific area switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure fluctuation|variation. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time saving end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of processing during a special figure display. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a support operation setting process; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a role game process; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the accessory usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a normal figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during normal per figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric remaining bulb processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of end processing per normal figure. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process; FIG. 4 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a safety device related process. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of an out-of-area integration process; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of difference ball confirmation processing. 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of safety device operation monitoring processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. It is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state. It is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state It is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. It is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal map fluctuation display game and the normal electric operation. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. In the second embodiment, it is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state. In the second embodiment, it is a table showing the number of time-savings corresponding to the symbol that is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of a normal figure fluctuation display game and normal electric operation|movement. In the second embodiment, from the time saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (normal game state to digest the remaining hold), the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), the general figure state, the general electric state, It is a timing chart showing the number of special figures 2 pending. It is a front view of a game board according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating transitions of game states in the third embodiment; In the third embodiment, it is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations (the number of prescribed remaining reservations), and the like. In 3rd Embodiment, it is the table which put together the operation|movement situation of time saving about the case where the operation opportunity of new time saving has generate|occur|produced from each game state. It is a figure explaining the display of the batch display apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of the normal figure fluctuation display game in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of normal electric operation|movement in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of variation pattern setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a table showing the setting situation of the variation pattern table according to the third embodiment with respect to each game state and special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an effect screen of a display device according to a third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment; FIG. In the third embodiment, it is a time chart showing the on/off state of jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information. In the third embodiment, it is a time chart showing how the test signal is output to the test-firing test device. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating winning easy state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a table showing how a firing position specifying signal is output according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the state of the output of the firing position designation|designated signal which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In the third embodiment, in the case of a small hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, it is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper big winning opening, the ON / OFF operation of the lever solenoid, and the like. In 3rd Embodiment, in the case of the small hit result of a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is a time chart which illustrates opening operation|movement of an upper big prize-winning opening, ON/OFF operation|movement of a lever solenoid, etc. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, it is a table showing the mode of the production system device according to the state of the safety device. FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (part 1); FIG. FIG. 11 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of a display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (part 2); FIG. FIG. 11 is another example (example 2) of the screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display that differs depending on the game state in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display before and after reach during variable display in the fourth embodiment; In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram illustrating an operation notice display during customer waiting. In the fourth embodiment, the display screen of the display device in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is illustrated. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of a specific model display that is displayed other than an image in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example (example 2) of a specific model display that is displayed other than a video in the fourth embodiment;

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge 16 so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). In addition, the left end of the opening/closing frame is a shaft attachment end to be attached to a hinge, and the right end is an open end to be opened by rotation. Note that the frame 11 and the front frame 12 constitute an outer frame unit 17 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14 . The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged in the upper center, right side, and left side of the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG. The decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c house lighting members such as LEDs therein, and are effect devices that perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

The decoration device 18a is a top unit extending in the horizontal direction of the game machine 10 above the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame) and protruding obliquely upward and forward. The decoration device 18a has a substantially flat front surface 456 having various indicia such as the model name. The decoration device 18a is fixed and does not operate in this embodiment, but it protrudes forward, upward, or obliquely from the retracted initial position (normal position) only when necessary so as to reduce the feeling of pressure on the player. It may move, move forward and backward, or move up and down. When the decoration device 18a (here, the top unit) operates (moves), it becomes a frame effect device (movable accessory) that can move from the initial position to the operating position.

The decoration device 18b is a protruding effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. The decoration device 18c is a projecting effect unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration devices 18b and 18c irradiate the player with light toward the central side (inside) of the gaming machine 10, and the light leaks to the outside of the gaming machine 10 through a plurality of openings.

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like. The left and right upper speakers 19a are covered with right and left speaker decoration members 470, respectively.

An upper plate unit 20 having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls (game media) is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an opening at the top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied to the ball shooting device one by one.

The upper tray unit 20 further includes an effect operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light emission effects or the like according to the game state. Prepare.

The production operation device is an operation device including the production button 25, the cross key switch 450, and the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b. is provided. The effect button 25 is arranged in the opening of the operation panel 490 so as to be surrounded by the operation panel 490 . The operation panel 490 can reflect light by plating the surface with metal or by making the entire panel made of metal, and has a metallic luster of silver, for example. When the production button 25 emits light, the light from the production button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 490, and the lighting production of the production button 25 becomes effective.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

The volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b are provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 690 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjust the volume of the speaker 19 (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b) by increasing or decreasing (+-). The cross key switch 450 (cross key SW) is provided adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b on the upper left side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjusts the brightness of the performance LED, for example. The cross key switch 450 may also be called a directional key switch, and may be a general one composed of a plurality of (for example, four) switches arranged in the front, back, left, and right. For example, in a predetermined state such as waiting for customers and/or playing a game (playing a game), the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b may be pressed to adjust the volume of the speaker 19. A switch in front of or behind 450 may be pushed down to adjust the amount of light (brightness, brightness) of the performance LED or the like. The volume of the speaker 19 may be adjusted by pressing the left or right switch of the cross key switch 450 without providing the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b.

By operating the effect operation device (especially the effect button 25) by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). can. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable probability state, probability variable state), a big hit state (special game state ), a small hit game state (small hit state). As described above, the game machine 10 has a plurality of game states with different occurrence probabilities of special results, and the game control device 100 (game state selection means, setting means) selects one game state from the plurality of game states. (Setting) to set the current game state.

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, it is also possible to always generate the variable probability state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the variable probability state by the big win symbol random number.

The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20 . The ball lending operation device includes a balance display section 490a, a ball lending button 27, and a return button . The balance display portion 490a is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed. A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player.

The decoration device 22 is provided in the upper tray unit 20 and is a device that accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside and performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit 20 and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower tray unit 29 including a lower tray 23 and the like is provided. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are matched in shape and arranged side by side in the vertical direction. By operating the upper tray operation part 435 of the upper tray unit 20, the game ball on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23. - 特許庁

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. The ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 when the player rotates the operation handle 24 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the rotation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball shooting device can change the shooting force (speed) of shooting the game ball to the game area 32 in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can perform various shooting modes with different shooting force. Can shoot game balls. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 is arranged below the upper tray unit 20 with a predetermined gap therebetween. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

In addition, on the back side of the front frame 12, there are a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and a tank from the upper tank 448. A payout device (payout unit) or the like for paying out the game balls that have flowed down to the upper tray 21 is arranged.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window portion that serves as a display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 also has an inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b enters the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win prizes.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides a condition for starting the special figure variation display game. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessories, electricity) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts to a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating forward. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. A game ball is more likely to enter the start winning hole 36 when hitting to the left, and a game ball is more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting to the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (win easy state advantageous to the player) in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy winning state), the movable member 37b is in a closed state (non-easy winning state, difficult winning state) in which game balls are difficult to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 . In this embodiment, unlike the normal variable prize winning device 37, the start winning port 36 does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), but the movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or special games. By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state generated in the normal game state in which the game is not performed, the time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, even in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, there is an attacker type opening the lower winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side by the lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (closed state unfavorable to the player) to an open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of reduced time/variable number of times after the end of the big win). A lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided in the lower special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for a game ball to win a prize when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable prize winning device 37, there is an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper special prize opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right by an upper special prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variable winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of reduced time/variable number of times after the end of the big win). An upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for the game ball to win when hitting to the right. Also, the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a special winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening) after the open/close door 39c is opened by the small win, the big win is decided. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only during a small hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. Along with confirming the shift, information indicating that there was a V prize (specified area passing command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine (1+2 type machine). In this embodiment, when the second special variable winning device 39 is opened with a small hit, the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening) in the second special variable winning device 39, and the big win is achieved. Occur.

When the game ball wins the general winning prize opening 35, the starting winning prize opening 36, the normal variable winning prize device 37, and the special variable winning prize devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) controls the winning prize winning port The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the ball is discharged from the payout device to the upper tray 21.例文帳に追加In addition, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a prize winning port. In addition, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, and their vicinity are provided with LEDs (board decoration device to be described later) that can emit light when a game ball wins. 46) are provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 configured from LED lamps (light emitting units, light emitting members) and displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variation display game It has a storage display unit (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56) for notifying the number of memories. The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is configured by lamps D13 and D14. The general map holding display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7), a second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and a high probability state of a big hit when the game machine 10 is turned on. Third game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying the state, number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of times of opening and closing special variable winning devices 38, 39) A round display portion 60 (lamps D3 to D6) for displaying is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display In addition, all LEDs provided as indicators are all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous flashing of all LEDs), cyclic lighting (lighting from any one LED in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals and extinguishing), or multiple may be performed by lighting and extinguishing (blinking) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the general figure indicator 53 can also be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52.

Lamp display device 80, the lamp display units 1, 2 (LED) to perform a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguished display as symbols (fourth special symbol, fourth symbol to be described later), and each special figure variation It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of start (hold) memories of the display game. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, switching between turning off and turning on the lamp display units 1 and 2 is performed in a period of 1/2 of the blink period (for example, 100 msec). While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) display the special figure 2 pending number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lit state, and blinking state do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41), the display of the number of reservations is displayed. conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins or enters a normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning devices 38, 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When game balls enter the general winning port 35, the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning port is sent to the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 through.

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number (normal pattern reservation number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added ( +1).

The normal pattern start memory (normal pattern suspension) stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the normal pattern variation display game.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern (normal pattern) displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are allowed to win.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball that has won a prize in a starting prize winning port 36 is detected as a prize winning ball in a special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball that has won a prize in a normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is a special figure 2. It is detected as the starting winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for each predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41 Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 reservation). . In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning prize to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 reservation), the special figure 2 variable display game with the special figure 2 indicator 52 to run.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols).

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol ( 4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols, and a jackpot state (special game state) is established. In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 switch the special prize winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3). converted. In other words, the special variable winning device 38, 39 is provided with a large winning opening that opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win a large number of game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived by the display pattern, and a small win state is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38, 39 changes the state of the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state. For the sake of simplicity, in this embodiment, only the special variable winning device 39 (upper big winning opening) is converted to the open state in the small winning state, and in the big winning state (including the big winning state by V winning during the small winning) A configuration in which only the special variable winning device 38 (lower grand winning opening) is converted to the open state will be described.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38,39. Further, the operation of the condition device may mean that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of simply winning a small prize lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V prize during the small hit state, the conditional device is activated. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure variation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 pending priority digestion, special figure 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may not be executed at the same time.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (38a) , 39a) includes a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. It is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). ) 111, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting control signals such as .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pushed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated. Initialization processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. For example, the winning probability may be increased as the probability setting value is increased. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42, setting means) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (positions inaccessible) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to transition to various states such as a changeable (settable) setting variable state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability set values can be confirmed. .

In the present embodiment, the probability setting values are defined, for example, in six stages: probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area changes from setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) to Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5 ) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → . Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work set values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability set values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work set values and probability set values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc. In addition, on the front surface of the gaming machine (eg, all-in-one display device 50), information on set values such as probability set values for display (for example, display for reading probability set values 1 to 6) may be displayed. In addition, on the front of the game machine (for example, the collective display device 50), not only during the setting variable state and the setting confirmation state, but also during execution of game control (during execution of game processing described later), the probability setting value for display, etc. Information about setting values may be displayed.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and normal reach (N reach), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

In addition, the expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability of a big hit when the production is selected, the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit, and the production when it is not a big hit (when it is lost). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. Design random number, pattern random number per support for determining the later-described time-saving design (stop design per support), variation pattern in special figure variation display game (running time of variation display game in variation display with various reach and reach, etc. A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number or the like for determining the A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. switch 36a, start-up 2 switch 37a in second start-up winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38, 39 big winning port switch 43 (lower big winning device) It is connected to the opening switch 38a and the upper prize winning opening switch 39a), and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is input. A converting interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . The specific area switch 72 detects passage (V winning) of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls passing through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing (that is, all game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a switch 63, a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the game machine 10 are input. .

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal that is output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output section 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a lever solenoid 86b that operates a lever and opens a specific area 86 for outputting open/close data. Two output ports 134 are provided.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 also includes a sixth output port 141 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152, the performance display device 152, and the performance display device 152. A seventh output port 142 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal 71 . The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives opening/closing data signals of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and a fourth driver 138c for outputting an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to an external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a performance display segment driver 150a that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152 that is output from the sixth output port 141, A performance display digit driver 150b is provided for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the performance display device 152 to be output.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential extracts current from the cathode terminal through a digit line, thereby forming a collective display device. At 50, the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method to light them. A performance display segment driver 150a that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a performance display digit driver 150b that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through a digit line. In the performance display device 152, the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method are supplied with the power supply voltage and lit. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) displays (LED lamps), and the performance display drivers 150a and 150b are LED drivers. However, it is not limited to this.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passed through the winning opening (winning number) and the number of games passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of balls. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out-ball detection switch 74 or the like. In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special variable winning devices 38, 39 (big winning openings) are included.

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls introduced into the game area 32), which is (number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). is calculated by That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 also has a function of a safety device. The safety device is a special figure fluctuation display game, a normal figure fluctuation display game, and a round game (during a big hit or a small hit) as a game, depending on the establishment of operating conditions (predetermined conditions) based on the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls. A game) is a game stop means (stop means) capable of generating a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) in which the game) cannot be executed. In the game stop state, a new special figure variation display game and a new normal figure variation display game cannot be started. With the safety device, it is possible to appropriately take countermeasures against fraud when the number of safe balls is abnormally high due to fraud, and it is also possible to suppress the player's addiction to the game. If the immersion is suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the safety device is a function implemented by software (program) in the game control device 100, and is also called a complete function (or an ending function or a stop function). Of course, the safety device may be provided as hardware such as an electric circuit or a circuit board.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation conditions of the safety device are as follows: (1) the number of difference balls, which indicates the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls, has reached the difference reference value (predetermined value); ) It is neither a big hit nor a small hit. The number of difference balls is obtained by subtracting the number of discharge balls from the number of safe balls (number of difference balls = number of safe balls - number of discharge balls). In this way, the operating condition of the safety device consists of two stages of conditions (1) and (2). Other operating conditions may be used. For example, condition (1) may be configured such that the number of safe balls reaches a predetermined value. Further, the condition (2) can be configured such that the special variable prize winning device is not in operation or the big prize winning opening is not in an open state.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is the total number of prize balls (the number of won balls, the number of balls paid out) determined to be paid out during a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present). If there is an error in the payout of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls determined to be paid out is equal to the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the upper tray 21 via the payout device. However, the total number of prize balls actually paid out may be measured by a detection switch or the like and used as the number of safe balls. The number of discharged balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74 .

Instead of the number of ejected balls, the number of shot balls that are shot and introduced into the game area 32 may be used, and the number of difference balls may be the number of safe balls - the number of shot balls. The number of game balls launched and the number of discharged balls may be collectively called the number of used balls (the number of difference balls = the number of safe balls - the number of used balls). From the number of shot balls, the foul balls that were shot by the ball shooting device but did not reach the game area 32 are excluded. If one ball is produced, +1 will be added. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of shot balls may be provided near the entrance of the game balls to the game area 32 , that is, near the upper end of the guide passage for the shot game balls on the game board 30 .

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the display content, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, controls the motor , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via the command I / F331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc., transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control command signal (production command) receive as Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the aforementioned lamp display device 80 .

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device (for example, a top unit) such as a motor (such as a motor for moving the top unit) provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the production button 25, a cross key switch 450, and a volume control device. button switches 451a and 451b, and the on/off state of the effect accessory switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311; A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the configuration described above and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps and motors. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number for judging the hit of the normal game based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game start gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. is compared with the determination value stored in , and the hit/loss of the normal pattern variation display game is determined.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed in a stopped manner. When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display device 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, , 3 seconds x 2 times) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display device 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100 . Furthermore, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the processing for generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a controls the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize winning port solenoid 39b to enable the inflow of game balls into the big prize winning port. .

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control may be performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is more likely than the normal game state in which no special game is performed. In order to control so that the open time is substantially increased, it becomes a general electricity support state. In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the normal power supply support is performed in a time-saving state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) can be shortened more than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern hit probability) is set to a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. is possible.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win prizes in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state in which special games are not performed, and the number of times the special figure variable display game is executed per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. Can be increased. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
As described above, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) (setting change state, settable state). state, setting change mode) (see A1030-A1039 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 15).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 5B A1034-A1039 and FIG. 15).

When the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and RAM initialization processing (RAM clear mode) occurs. process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1045-A1047 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5C, and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A, 5B, and 5C are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the shooting of game balls from the ball shooting device is prohibited. ing. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power delay timer, a program of subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that forms the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the is normally activated. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 performs a process of timing the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the waiting time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

The game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009) when a power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), and determines whether the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RWM (Read/Write) such as RAM and EEPROM. memory) is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state of no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM (RAM 111c in this case) (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), checksum calculation to calculate the checksum of a predetermined area (for example, work area in the area) in the RWM The process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating RAM abnormality is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the variable setting state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1030-A1040. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it is set (A1022). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in steps A1034-A1040 (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), steps A1044-A1047 The RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) or the normal power-on (power recovery) process of steps A1044, A1048-A1051 is executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is "Y"), the main abnormality that notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification notifies that the game control device 100 has an abnormality.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 outputs the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1") at the time of game stop to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 in order to display it on the performance display device 152 ( A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. It should be noted that, while waiting to repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing that can execute special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 9) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, it is assumed that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed. , A1024-A1026. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) A command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of error display of "E1") at the time of game stop is output to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the external device In order to notify the RAM abnormality to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off.

After that, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1027), and if a power failure has not occurred (the result of A1027 is "N"), the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred (result of A1027 is "Y"), OFF data is output to all output ports (A1028), and read/write memory such as RAM and EEPROM (read/write memory) ) is prohibited (A1029). After that, it waits until the game machine is powered off.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1030). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1030 is "Y"), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the minimum set value "1") (A1031), a probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1032). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1030 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1032). Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1037. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1034). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1035). Then, the command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1036), and the process proceeds to step A1037. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting informs that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1033 or step A1036, the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A1037 to A1043 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1037). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 15) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1319). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1038). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039). If the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1039 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1040). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1040 is "N"), the process returns to step A1039. On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (the result of A1040 is "Y"), the processing at power failure occurrence of steps A1063 to A1069 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1039 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits the interruption (A1041), and issues a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1042). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1043). If the probability setting changing flag is set (result of A1043 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1045 to A1047 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1043 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1048 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1034 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1044). If the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1044 is "Y"), the RAM areas other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set values are cleared to 0 (A1045). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Here, the aforementioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Also, the obtained game ball number area for storing the obtained game ball number which is the number (total) of prize balls obtained within a predetermined time period (here, within one timer interrupt) is cleared to zero. Then, the safety device operating flag area storing the safety device operating flag indicating whether the safety device (described above) is operating is cleared to 0 (safety device operating flag = 0), and the safety device is operating. be released. In step A1045, whether the RAM is cleared with setting change (if the result of A1043 is "Y") or the RAM is cleared without setting change (if the result of A1044 is "Y"), the Although the operation of the safety device is canceled by clearing the device operation flag area to 0, the operation of the safety device may be canceled only in one case. That is, there may be a case where the safety device operating flag area is not cleared to 0 when the RAM is cleared in step A1045.

Also, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and unused area, and a work area for performance display related to performance information and its display (performance display) (a part of the work area outside the area) ) and stack area (outside stack area) do not need to be cleared. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1046). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1047), it moves to the processing of step A1052. Areas not cleared to 0 in step A1045 are excluded from the areas to be initialized.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1044 is "N"), the game control device 100 operates normally because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off. The processing at the time of power-on (when power is restored from a power failure) is started, and the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is restored) is saved in an area to be initialized as power failure recovery processing (A1048). Areas to be initialized here include power failure inspection area 1, power failure inspection area 2, and checksum area of the intra-area work area (FIG. 6). In addition, since all errors are re-monitored when the power is turned on normally, the area to be initialized is the area related to error or error monitoring (test signal output data area, etc.). In addition, the aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared (initialized) here. Areas to be initialized in step A1048 may be added as necessary. Note that, unlike when the RAM is initialized, when the power is turned on normally, the safety device activation flag area in the work area within the area (Fig. 6) is not cleared (initialized) so that the safety device operation is not canceled. value is preserved.

In addition, safety device related work areas (safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, old operation information area described later) related to safety devices in the work area outside the area are not initialized in step A1048, but safety device information initialization described later is performed. Initialized in the initialization process (A1053). In addition, by initializing the safety device counter value (information on the number of difference balls) in the safety device counter area, there is room for the operation of the safety device (occurrence of a game stoppage state) regarding the number of difference balls Range, limit of number of difference balls) can be increased. The performance display work area of the outside work area is also not initialized in step A1048, but may be initialized in performance display edit processing (A1059) as described later.

In addition, in step A1048 when the power is turned on normally without RAM initialization (when the power is restored from a power failure), the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed in a state other than the probability variable state after the power is turned on or after the jackpot ends A ceiling counter area (described later) in which the indicated ceiling counter value is stored may also be maintained without being cleared (initialized) so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. As will be described later, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling number of times, it becomes a time saving state (FIG. 36B), but the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized), so the time saving state (to the ceiling number of times) The remaining game The number of times does not change when the power is turned on, and the player is not disadvantaged.

The number of executions (that is, the ceiling counter value) or the number of games remaining until the ceiling (number of ceilings-number of executions) is displayed on the display device 41 by a fluctuation number display 677 (see FIGS. 92, 100, etc.), which will be described later. In this case, the effect control device 300 may match the change count display 677 with the ceiling counter value of the ceiling counter area when the power is turned on normally, or set the change count display 677 to the initial value 0 without matching. may be displayed. If no match is obtained, the change count display 677 will display a value that does not reflect the ceiling counter value.

Similarly, in step A1048, the remaining execution of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game and special figure 2 fluctuation display game) in the time saving state so as not to be disadvantageous to the game hall side (gaming parlor side) A time reduction variation number 1 area that stores a time reduction variation number 1 (described later) corresponding to the number of times, and a time reduction variation number 2 that corresponds to the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the time reduction state (described later). A value may be maintained without clearing (initializing) the stored time reduction variation count 2 area. In addition, on models that have a probability variation state of the number cut type (ST), in order not to be disadvantageous to the game hall side, special figure fluctuation display games (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) in the probability variation state ) may be maintained without being cleared (initialized), in which the number of times of high probability fluctuations (ST counter) is stored. In addition, on models that have a limit on the number of consecutive big wins (the number of consecutive wins described later), the number of consecutive big wins will not be disadvantageous to the amusement center side. The value may be maintained without clearing (initializing) the number of jackpots area in which is stored.

Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing etc. described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1049), step It shifts to the processing of A1050.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1047 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1049 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for RAM initialization and the command for power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information commands) are included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and informs the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the LED of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speaker. Seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is a customer waiting demo command during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting), otherwise it may be a recovery screen command. Also, the command at the time of power failure recovery may include a command indicating the ceiling counter value in order to match the fluctuation count display 677 and the ceiling counter value as described above.

Next, it is determined whether or not the safety device is in operation (A1050). For example, it can be determined that the safety device is operating when "1" indicating that the safety device is operating is saved in the safety device operating flag area as the safety device operating flag (safety device Active flag=1). Then, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A1050 is "Y"), a safety device in operation command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent to the production control device 300 (production control board). (A1051), the process proceeds to step A1052. If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A1050 is "N"), the process proceeds directly to step A1052.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is saved (PUSH) in the stack area within the area (A1052), and the safety device information related to the safety device (safety device counter value, safety device operation information, old operation information, etc. described later) (A1053). Thereafter, the information in the flag register is restored (POP) (A1054). In addition, except when the game is stopped due to a RAM error (A1025-A1026), the safety device information (safety device counter value, etc.) is unconditionally initialized (cleared) when the power is turned on, but a count continuation switch is provided. If the power is turned on while pressing the count continuation switch, the safety device information does not need to be initialized (cleared).

In addition, as described later, when shifting to safety device information initialization processing, the stack pointer is related to safety device information, performance information and performance display (display of performance information) from the stack area in the area related to game control Switch to out-of-bounds stack area. At that time, when the stack pointer for game control is stored in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, the flag of the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change, so the information of the flag register is saved in advance in step A1052. back. The flag register is a flag in which each bit of 8 bits takes a value of 0 or 1. As for the flag register, those disclosed in JP-A-2013-233299, JP-A-2018-94101, etc. can be used.

Next, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1055). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. In the present embodiment, the random number generation circuit includes, as random numbers updated only by hardware, a jackpot random number, a hit pattern random number (a jackpot pattern random number, a small hit pattern random number, a support pattern random number, etc.), a general pattern hit random number , and generate variation pattern random numbers 1-3. These random numbers may be so-called "high-speed counters" that are updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1056), and determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1057). When the safety device is activated (when the safety device is in operation flag = 1), there is a strong error 2 (described later) that requires stopping the game (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) If it occurs, it can be determined that the game is stopped.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1057 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the information (value) of the flag register to the stack area in the area (A1058), (A1059). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, if there is an error in the performance display work area (a part of the outside work area) related to the performance information or its display (performance display), it may be cleared. After that, the information in the flag register is restored (POP) (A1060), and the interrupt is permitted (A1061). In addition to the case where no error has occurred at all, even if a weak error (described later) or a strong error 1 (described later) which is an error other than the strong error 2 has occurred, the game is not stopped and the performance display editing process is performed. The processing of steps A1058-A1060 is executed including the above. It should be noted that a configuration is also possible in which the processes of steps A1058 to A1060 are not executed when a weak error or a strong error 1 has occurred.

In addition, as described later, when moving to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is moved from the stack area within the area related to game control to outside the area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information) Switch to stack area. At that time, since the flag of the flag register (especially zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of the RAM 111c, save the information of the flag register in advance in step A1058. back.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (result of A1057 is "Y"), the game control device 100 permits interruption without executing the performance display editing process (A1061). That is, when the safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (particularly, the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so the performance information such as the base value is It is not newly calculated and does not change. It should be noted that, even if the strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to execute the performance display editing process without stopping the game. In addition, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) can be executed by permitting interrupts.

In this embodiment, errors are classified into three categories: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the error/injustice system command sets error notification of different strength corresponding to the weak error, the strong error 1, and the strong error 2 in the error/injustice setting process (B1316). can run.

For example, the production control device 300 controls the volume of the error notification sound from the speaker, or the luminance (brightness) of the LED (the production LED of the board decoration device 46 or the frame decoration device 18) that emits light for error notification. , weak error<strong error 1≦strong error 2. Note that the sound volume of the speaker or the brightness of the LED may be the same for the strong error 1 and the strong error 2. FIG. In addition, when a weak error occurs, the effect control device 300 sets the volume of the notification sound to the volume (below the maximum volume) adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), and strong error 1 and strong error 2. occurs, the volume of the notification sound may be set to the maximum volume.

The weak error is a shot ball exhaustion error such that a shot ball exhaustion switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the bottom tray 23 becoming full. Including overflow errors like In a weak error, no external information signal is output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 54A). Further, the weak error may include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

A strong error 1 is a frame open error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame open error and a body frame open error (front frame open error). In strong error 1, a door/frame open signal (A9305) is output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see FIG. 54A).

Severe error 2 is a fraudulent error related to fraud, and it is preferable to stop the game. Including electric fraud. In strong error 2, the security signal (A9322) is output to the external information terminal 71 as the external information signal (see FIG. 54A). Also, the strong error 2 may include the remaining ball error. When the strong error 2 occurs, the game (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.) is stopped, and it can be determined that the game is stopped (A1057). In addition, when a strong error 2 occurs, as in the case where the safety device is activated, special figure fluctuation display games, normal figure fluctuation display games, and round games (games during big hits and small hits) ) and the like can be generated in a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state).

After step A1061, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1062). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1062 is "N"), the process returns to step A1056. As a result, the loop processing of steps A1056-A1062 is repeated until a power failure occurs. Until a power failure occurs, performance information such as the base value can be repeatedly calculated in the performance display editing process (A1059) unless the game is stopped, that is, unless the safety device is activated or a strong error 2 occurs.

Since the repetition period of the loop processing is considerably shorter than the interrupt period of the timer interrupt (predetermined time period, eg, 4 msec), the performance display editing process is executed many times during the interrupt period. Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize or the number of discharged balls changes (a game ball enters the out port 30b), the performance information such as the base value can be changed immediately.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1062 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1063), and outputs off data to all output ports ( A1064). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1065), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1066). Further, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1067), and the calculated checksum is saved in the checksum area (A1068). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1069), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

The main processing has been described above. For example, if the setting key switch and the RAM initialization switch are turned on during the processing of steps A1056 to A1062, the determination processing similar to that of step A1021 is performed, and step A1032 Similarly, by setting the probability setting changing flag, it may be possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while the game machine 10 is running.

[Configuration example of RAM area]
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, an inner work area, an unused area, an inner stack area, an unused area, an outer work area, an unused area, and an outer stack area are arranged in this order from the start address of the RAM 111c. Unused area between the work area inside the area and the stack area inside the area (stack area for game control, stack area for inside the area) and unused area between the work area outside the area and the stack area outside the area (stack area for outside the area) There can be no region.

The work area within the area of the RAM (work area for game control, first area) is a work area for game control that is read and written by the program within the area and read by the program outside the area. In-area work areas include probability set value area, test signal output data area (including error test signal output data area), random number area, switch control area, segment area, power failure inspection area 1, power failure inspection area 2, check In addition to the thumb area, a safety device operating flag area that indicates whether the safety device is operating (whether it has been operated), and a prize ball won within one interrupt (for example, 4 msec) of the timer interrupt Including acquired game ball number area for storing the acquired game ball number.

The out-of-area work area (second area) of the RAM is an area that is read and written by the out-of-area program and read by the in-area program. The work area outside the area is the safety device counter area that stores the safety device counter value (number of difference + initial value) corresponding to the number of difference balls, and the safety device activation information that stores the safety device activation information corresponding to the state of the safety device. Areas, including an old actuation information area that stores old actuation information, and is capable of storing safety device information associated with the safety device. The safety device counter area (3 bytes size) is basically not read by the program in the area, but when transmitting the information on the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls to the production control device 300 with the difference ball command, It may be read and referenced by the local program. In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the number of difference balls in proportion to the number of difference balls (safety device counter value=number of difference balls+100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this as long as it is associated with the number of difference balls and suggests the number of difference balls. Separating the outside work area from the inside work area makes it possible to improve the efficiency of program development, and also makes it easier to differentiate and initialize these areas.

Furthermore, the outside work area includes a performance display work area related to performance information and performance display, and can store information related to performance information and performance display. Additionally, the extra-area work area may store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring. In the outside work area, the safety device related work area related to safety device information (including safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, old operation information area), performance information and performance display related to performance display The work areas may be clearly divided and arranged, or may be mixed.

Then, the out-of-area stack area is shared by the processing related to performance information and performance display and the processing related to the safety device. The out-of-area stack area is also used when performing processing related to test signals and processing related to error monitoring.

Note that the in-area program (in-area processing program) and the outside area program (outside-area processing program) are arranged with an unused area in between in the ROM 111b and are distinguished from each other. The program in the ROM area consists of a game control program, game control data, etc., and includes a main program corresponding to main processing (FIGS. 5A-5C) and an interrupt processing program corresponding to timer interrupt processing described later. A subroutine of the main program or interrupt handling program may be an out-of-bounds program. The programs outside the ROM area include a safety device information initialization program corresponding to the safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to the performance display editing processing, and an out-of-area integration processing program corresponding to the later-described out-of-area integration processing. including.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, details of the safety device information initialization process (A1053) in the main process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of safety device information initialization processing. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and old operation information area are initialized or cleared, and the safety device information such as the safety device counter value, safety device operation information, and old operation information is initialized. Make it a value (initial information). The safety device actuation information is information indicating the current state, and the old actuation information indicates the previous state (mainly before one interruption).

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area of the work area outside the area (A1101), and sets the value of the stack area outside the area (stack area for outside the area) to the stack pointer as the top of the stack area outside the area. is set (A1102). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the inner stack area to the outer stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the information (value) of the register to the stack area outside the area (A1103). The registers to be saved may be only the registers to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization processing), or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (A1104). When the number of difference balls decreases from 0, such as when a big hit does not occur, the safety device counter value (= number of difference balls + initial value) may be smaller than the initial value, so the initial value is set larger than 0. However, any value other than 100,000 may be used. In this way, when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. Unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on, the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times that the ceiling counter has been set does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored. When the safety device counter value (information on the number of difference balls) is initialized (cleared), there is a margin (tolerance of the number of difference balls, the number of difference balls limit) can be increased to the player's advantage. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), so the remaining number of games (up to the ceiling count) until the time saving state occurs does not change depending on the power on. , to the player's advantage. Then, safety device non-operating information (value 0) corresponding to the non-operating state (normal state) of the safety device is saved as safety device operating information in the safety device operating information area (A1105). Further, the safety device inoperative information (value 0) is saved as old operation information in the old operation information area (A1106).

Next, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A1107), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A1108), and terminates the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In the above safety device information initialization process, if the information is directly written to the RAM without using the register, the register is not saved/restored. In this case, since the registers are not saved to the RAM, the processes related to the stack pointer (A1101, A1102, A1103, A1107, A1108) are also unnecessary. In addition, the saving/restoring of the flag register (A1052, A1054) before and after the safety device information initialization process becomes unnecessary.

In the present embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189999), the safety device activation information indicates the non-activated state (activation notice) in which the safety device is not activated (normal). state, operation warning state, normal state (not operating state), and the safety device non-operating information (value 0). When the safety device counter value is 190000 to 194999 (safety device counter = 190000 to 194999), the safety device activation information is the safety device activation notice information (value 1) corresponding to the activation notice state that announces the activation of the safety device. Become.

In addition, when the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195000 (safety device counter = 195000) and the game cannot be stopped, the safety device operation information warns the operation of the safety device. It becomes the safety device activation warning information (value 2) corresponding to the warning state. In this case, even if the number of difference balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) reaches the reference value of 95000, the above condition (1) is established, but the condition ( This corresponds to the case where 2) is not established and the operating condition of the safety device is not established.

Further, when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 (safety device counter = 195000) and the game is stopped, the safety device activation information corresponds to the operating state (operating state) in which the safety device is in operation. It becomes safety device operating information (value 3). In this case, the difference ball number reaches the difference ball reference value 95000, and there is neither a big hit nor a small hit. Equivalent to

[Performance display editing process]
Next, details of the performance display editing process (A1059) in the main process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display editing processing.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area of the outside work area (A1201), and sets the stack pointer to the top of the outside stack area (outside stack area) as the value of the outside stack area. is set (A1202). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the inner stack area to the outer stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the register information (value) to the outside stack area for both the register bank 0 and the register bank 1 (A1203). Here, it is preferable to save all general purpose registers. Then, among the work areas outside the area, the performance display work area is judged to be justifiable, and if it is not valid and is abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including initial value setting). (A1204).

In the validity determination, if the value stored in the performance display work area is a design-impossible value or deviates from the design value (outside a predetermined range), it can be determined to be invalid. For example, it determines whether or not a specific value (for example, 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialized flag indicating that the performance display work area has been initialized, and divides the data used for calculating the base value. Determines whether the number for managing the progress of processing is within a predetermined range, determines whether the value of the switch counter is within a range equal to or less than the number of switches to be monitored, and obtains a display period management number indicating the current display period. is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 3), and it is determined whether the total section number indicating the current total section is within the range of the number of sections (0 to 4). In this way, it is preferable to determine whether the value of the area used as the pointer for the data table is within a predetermined range in the validity determination. This can prevent the program from crashing by getting a value that is out of range. Moreover, it is effective because the validity determination is performed for each performance display editing process.

In addition, since the validity judgment is executed each time the performance display editing process is executed, if the performance display work area is not valid, it can be initialized immediately, resulting in an abnormal performance display (abnormal base value). etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, initialization of the performance display work area (including initial value setting) targets areas other than the stack pointer storage area so as to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that the outside stack area is not initialized in this embodiment, but may be initialized. Even when the outside stack area is initialized, the values of the registers saved in the outside stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the work area within the area (work area for game control) and the stack area within the area (stack area for game control), so the work area within the area and does not affect the stack area within the region.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is time to switch the tabulation interval for tabulating the data (the number of normal out balls, the number of normal winning balls, etc.) that is the basis of the calculation of the base value (ball output rate). (A1205). A tally interval is provided for the total number of out balls (total number of discharged balls, total number of out balls) since the power is turned on, and each time the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, every time it increases by 60,000), a tally interval is set. can be switched.

For example, the switching timing of the tally section is the timing when the total number of out balls from turning on the power reaches 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, . . . That is, the width of the aggregation interval is basically 60,000 except for the first aggregation interval, the first aggregation interval = 0 to 300, the second aggregation interval = 300 to 60,300, and the third aggregation interval = 60,300 to 60,300. 120,300 pieces, 4th tabulation interval=120,300 to 180,300 pieces, 5th tabulation interval=180,300 to 240,300 pieces, and so on. The tally section numbers indicating the first to fifth tally sections are 0 to 4, respectively, and the tally section number is maintained at 4 for the sixth and subsequent tally sections. Note that the current aggregate section number is stored in the performance display work area.

The game control device 100, when it is time to switch the tabulation section (the result of A1205 is "Y"), sets the tabulation section switching (A1206). In the tabulation section switching settings, the total out counter that counts the total number of out balls (total number of outs) and the number of normal out balls (number of normal outs) that is the number of out balls (number of discharged balls) in each tabulation section are counted. Clear the normal out counter and the normal prize number counter that counts the number of normal prize balls that is the total number of prize balls (number of won balls) in each tally section, or the final base value (or the latest base value) of each tally section value) is shifted (moved) to the base value storage area of the next aggregation interval.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (A1207) when it is not the time to switch the tabulation section (the result of A1205 is "N"). In this embodiment, the input ports to be monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see FIG. 3).

Here, the switch rising edge information (copied in step A9603 in FIG. 58) copied to the performance display work area for each input port to be monitored is checked. For each monitored input port, there is an 8-bit field to store copied switch rising edge information. It can be determined that there is no input when the switch rising edge information for all input ports to be monitored is all 0, and it can be determined that there is an input in other cases. As the switch rising edge information, the bit corresponding to the switch with new input (detection) is set to 1 in the input processing (A1303) unless masked at the time of copying. bit is set to 0.

When there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (the result of A1207 is "Y"), the game control device 100 checks the input of the switch (target switch) corresponding to the switch counter and acquires the input information. (A1208). The target switches here are the lower large winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, the starting opening 1 switch 36a of the first starting winning opening 36, Starting port 2 switch 37a of the second starting winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a (left winning port switch, right winning port switch) of the general winning port 35, out ball detection switch 74, etc., game balls can change the base value (or ball payout rate) by detecting .

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the valid period of the target switch (A1209). In addition, when the big winning hole fraud or electric power fraud occurs and winning to the big winning hole or the second starting winning hole 37 is invalid, that is, the big winning hole switches 38a and 39a and the starting hole 2 switch 37a are not valid. Sometimes. In addition, there are always effective switches such as the first starting winning port 36 and the out ball detection switch 74 .

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter when it is the valid period of the target switch (the result of A1209 is "Y") (A1210). If it is not the effective period of the target switch (result of A1209 is "N") or if there is no input to the target switch (result of A1210 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1218.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (A1211), and is in the normal base state. (A1212). The normal base state (low base state) is a period during which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal game state in this embodiment.

When the game control device 100 is in the normal base state (during the normal game state) (the result of A1212 is "Y"), if the target switch is a switch to which a prize ball is awarded, the prize corresponding to the target switch By adding the number of balls, the number of normal prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls in the tally section, is updated (A1213). Subsequently, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the number of normal out balls (normal out number, normal discharged ball number), which is the number of out balls in the tally section, is updated (A1214). ). Next, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the total number of out balls (total number of out balls, total number of discharged balls) is updated (A1215).

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32 (that is, all game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only the game ball that entered the out hole 30b, but also the game ball that entered the winning hole (first start winning hole 36, second starting winning hole 37, big winning hole, or general winning hole 35) It is detected by being guided to the out-ball detection switch 74 via a passage or the like.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal base state which is the normal game state (the result of A1212 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates only the total number of out balls without updating the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls. (A1215). Therefore, in the high base state (second game state, time saving state, probability variable state or special game state) that is not the normal base state, neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls is updated, and the number of normal prize balls and the normal out ball The base value calculated from the number (the number of normal winning balls / the number of normal out balls) is not updated and does not change. It is also possible to omit the determination processing relating to the normal base state in step A1212 and make the base value updateable (changeable) as the payout rate in all game states.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the switch counter by +1 in order to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process (A1216). Note that the performance display editing process is executed at time intervals (for example, several microseconds) considerably shorter than the timer interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle, for example, 4 msec) by loop processing in the main processing. Thus, during the interrupt period, the performance display edit process is repeatedly executed, and the switch counter (eg, 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (eg, bit 0 to bit 7) for each monitored input port. . Also, the switch counter is updated to 0 after the last value (eg, 7) and the switch input starts checking for the next monitored input port. For example, after first checking the input of the switch with respect to the third input port 124 , the input of the switch is then checked with respect to the fourth input port 126 .

On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) for calculating a base value when there is no switch input to any of the input ports to be monitored (the result of A1207 is "N"). (A1217). It should be noted that there is a case where there is no switch input from the beginning to the input port to be monitored. On the other hand, even if some or all of the monitored input ports initially have switch inputs, after the switch inputs have been checked for all monitored input ports, the target switch input Since the information has been cleared (A1211), there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal out balls, and is calculated by the number of normal prize balls/the number of normal out balls. Therefore, when a ball enters the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37), the big winning opening, or the general winning opening 35, the winning opening to which the prize ball is awarded as the first stage By the input (detection) of the switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 39a, the number of prize balls is usually updated and changed, the base value changes, and as the second step, the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74 The number of out balls is usually updated and changed, and the base value changes. That is, when one game ball enters the winning hole, the base value changes (is affected) in two stages. When a ball enters the out port 30b opening in the game board 30, the number of out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74, and the base value also changes. On the other hand, when there is a ball entering the normal start gate 34, the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated and do not change by the ball entering itself, so the base value is maintained without changing. be. Even if there is a ball entering the normal figure starting gate 34, the number of prize balls is not normally updated because no prize balls are given.

The base value is output as a performance display to the performance display device 152 by the processing of steps A1624 to A1630 of the output processing regardless of whether or not it has changed. However, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, or when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the performance display device 152 is turned off by outputting off data.

As a special example, the calculation of the base value may be executed only during the real-time value display period during which the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed. The number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are updated, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step A1216 or A1217, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A1218), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A1219), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In FIG. 8, the processing of step A1217 is performed immediately after step A1214, and the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls is updated without waiting for the input check of all the switches of the input port to be monitored. A configuration is also possible in which the base value calculation process is performed immediately after the calculation.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an input process of taking in inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), based on the output data set in various processes, the actuator such as the solenoid (for example, the big winning opening solenoid 39b) output processing for driving control of LEDs and LED driving control (light emission control) is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal can be output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting commands (payout commands, etc.) set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307). After that, monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitor errors (front frame and glass frame open) (A1308).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1309). It can be determined that the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag=1) or when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A1309 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (A1310), role game processing (A1311), normal figure game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing processing. (A1313) is executed. After that, the process after step A1314 is executed. In addition to the case where no error has occurred at all, even if a weak error and a strong error 1 have occurred, special figure game processing (A1310), role game processing (A1311), general figure game processing ( A1312), and segment LED edit processing (A1313) is executed.

In the segment LED editing process, settings related to driving of some of the plurality of segment LEDs (storage display section, round display section, etc.: LED lamps D3 to D7, D11 to D17) constituting the collective display device 50 are executed. Settings related to the driving of other parts of the collective display device 50 (variation display units: LED lamps D1, D2, D8, D10, D18) are executed in the symbol variation control process (A2615, A2617, A7615). . Settings related to driving of another part of the collective display device 50 (probability state display unit: LED lamp D9) are executed in power failure recovery processing (A1048).

When the game is stopped (the result of A1309 is "Y"), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (A1310), role game processing (A1311), normal figure game processing (A1312), and segment LED editing. Without executing the process (A1313), the process after step A1314 is performed. In this way, when the safety device is activated, or when the game is stopped due to the occurrence of a strong error 2, the special figure game processing (A1310) and the general figure game processing (A1312) are not executed, so the number of special figure reservations (A2906, A4611) and the number of pending charts (A7707, A7918) do not change. On the other hand, when a weak error or a strong error 1 occurs, the game is not stopped, and the special figure game process (A1310) and the general figure game process (A1312) are executed, so the number of special figure reservations (A2906, A4611 ) and the number of pending charts (A7707, A7918) can be changed by +1 update (when a hold occurs) or -1 update (when a hold is completed).

In addition, depending on the type of error such as weak error, strong error 1 and strong error 2, special figure game processing (A1310), character game processing (A1311), general figure game processing (A1312), segment LED editing processing ( A1313), a configuration is also possible in which some of them are executed and the others are not executed. For example, only the segment LED editing process may be executed when a strong error 2 occurs.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device to the presentation control device 300 as a production command, and executes safety device related processing capable of setting a flag during safety device operation (A1314). . Then, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 is checked to execute magnet fraud monitoring processing to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process for monitoring abnormal ejection from the big winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special variable prize winning device 39 from the large winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. is monitored, and an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 passes through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, as in step A1309 and the like, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (A1320).

The game control device 100, when the game is not stopped (the result of A1320 is "N"), saves the flag register in the stack area within the area (A1321), updates the safety device counter value (calculates the number of difference balls), Out-of-area integration processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the flag register is restored (A1323), and the timer interrupt processing ends. When the safety device is not activated and the strong error 2 is not generated, the game is not stopped and the processes of steps A1321-A1323 including the outside area integration process are executed.

It should be noted that, as will be described later, when shifting to the outside-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the inside-area stack area related to game control to the outside-area stack area. At that time, since the flag of the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer saving area of the RAM 111c, the flag register is previously saved in step A1321.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1320 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the timer interrupt process without executing the outside area integration process or the like. That is, when the safety device is activated (when the safety device is in operation flag = 1) or when a strong error 2 occurs, the out-of-area integrated processing is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the base value The display contents of the performance display such as are not updated. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary control while the game is stopped.

In addition, unlike the above, even if a strong error 2 occurs, the game is not stopped, and special game processing (A1310), role game processing (A1311), normal game processing (A1312), segment LED editing processing (A1313) ) is also possible. Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, a configuration is also possible in which the out-of-area integration process or the like is executed.

Also, when the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output processing (A1306) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

First, the game control device 100 outputs OFF data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50, and resets the output port 135 (A1601 ). Subsequently, output data for turning off all solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 86b, general electric solenoid 37c) is set (A1602). Then, as in step A1309 and the like, it is determined whether or not the game is being stopped (A1603). It can be determined that the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag=1) or when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs.

The game control device 100 outputs the data of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the general electric solenoid 37c to the solenoid output port 134 when the game is not stopped (the result of A1603 is "N"). Data are synthesized (A1604). Then, the data is output to the solenoid output port 134 (A1605). When the game is stopped (the result of A1603 is "Y"), nothing is done, and the process proceeds to step A1605 to output OFF data (A1602) to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when the game is stopped, the operation of all the solenoids is stopped, and the big winning opening, the specific area 86, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the like are closed to be in the closed state. In this way, the big winning opening is closed in the game stop state, and the round game (the game during the big win or the small win) cannot be executed.

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (adds only 1, but 0 after 3). updated) (A1606). Further, the digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1607). Then, the acquired digit output data and external information data are combined (A1608), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1609).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off data as segment output data to the segment line (A1610). Then, output data for prohibiting firing is set (A1611). Further, as in step A1603 and the like, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (A1612).

When the game is not stopped (result of A1612 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the segment output data from the segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter to the segment line (A1613), and shoots. Permission output data is set (A1614), and the loaded segment output data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615). In addition, this segment area may be included in the intra-area work area (game control work area).

In this way, when the game is not stopped, each time the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected to connect eight segments of digits connected to this digit line. Segment output data is output on line. Digit 0 to digit 3 (digits 0 to 3) are sequentially selected to realize a dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting control) for the collective display device 50. FIG.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1612 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs off data (A1610) to the output port 135 for segment output without processing steps A1613 and A1614. Output (A1615). As a result, the collective display device 50 is turned off in the game stop state when the safety device is activated (when the safety device activation flag is 1) or when the strong error 2 occurs. As a result, the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game cannot be executed in the game stop state. A player who sees the collective display device 50 can recognize that the game is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that a strong error 2 (illegal error) has occurred.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1616), and further synthesizes the synthesized external information data and the output data of firing permission or firing prohibition (A1617 ), and outputs the finally combined data to the external information/fire permission signal output port 137 (A1618). Here, when the game is not stopped, the output data becomes shooting permission (A1614), and when the game is stopped, the output data becomes shooting prohibition (shooting stop) (A1611). As a result, in the game stop state when the safety device is activated or when the strong error 2 occurs, the game ball is prohibited from being shot from the ball launching device, while in the game stop state If not, shooting of game balls from the ball shooting device is permitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to permit the shooting of game balls from the ball shooting device even in the game stop state, and not to prohibit shooting (stop shooting).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 , and outputs the synthesized data (A1619). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1620).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, (A1621). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1622). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1623).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs OFF data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for outputting segment data of the performance display device (LED) 152 and resets the output port 141 (A1624). Next, the value of the digit counter 2 for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the performance display device 152 is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (only 1 is added, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (A1625). . Further, the digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter 2 is obtained (A1626). Then, the acquired digit output data is output to the output port 142 (digit output port 2) (A1627).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped (A1628), like step A1603. If the game is not stopped (the result of A1628 is "N"), the segment output data is loaded from the performance display device segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1629). The performance display device segment area is included in the performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). Then, the loaded segment output data is output to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (A1630), and then the output processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (the result of A1628 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the output process without executing the processes of steps A1629 and A1630. Therefore, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped (when the safety device is in operation flag = 1) or when the game is stopped due to the occurrence of a strong error 2, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area cannot be output to the output port 141, the OFF data in step A1624 is output to the output port 141 for the performance display device 152 as it is. Then, in this case, when the value of the digit counter 2 makes a cycle in the range of 0 to 3, the performance display device 152 is forcibly extinguished with all the LEDs turned off, and the performance display device 152 is turned off. can recognize that the game is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that a strong error 2 (illegal error) has occurred.

Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to configure such that the processing of steps A1629 and A1630 is executed without stopping the game.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
Next, the details of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the acquired game ball number area included in the intra-area work area to 0 (A2001). As a result, the acquired game ball number area becomes an area for storing the acquired game ball number, which is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption (within a predetermined time period). The number of acquired game balls is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption. Then, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper big winning opening switch 39a in the upper big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is prepared (A2002). Then, even though the upper special winning opening is not open, the upper special winning opening is monitored for illegal winning and normal winning is detected (A2003).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower winning opening switch 38a in the lower winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (A2004). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the lower special winning opening even though the lower special winning opening is not open, and to detect normal winning (A2005).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2006). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor fraudulent winning and detect normal winning (A2007). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches that can always win and does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2008). The winning opening switch that can always win a prize is the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the general winning opening 35, and the like.

Next, the game control device 100 executes winning number counter update processing for updating the winning number (A2009). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose status should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2010). The state scan counter is updated with a range of 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2012).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (switch abnormality error ) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball out error) based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the payout error status signal (payout error) is set. monitoring is set. In this way, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 monitors weak errors.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2013). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (A2014).

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave fraud signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2015). Then, if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2015 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2017.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2015 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control. A payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) is executed (A2016), and the process proceeds to step A2017.

Note that the processing of step A2016 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing of A2016 is performed every 16 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 executes V passage timing monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area switch 72 at inappropriate timing (A2017). In the V passage timing monitoring process, when the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at inappropriate timing, it is regarded as a V passage error.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring whether or not game balls remain in the specific area switch 72 (A2018), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

It should be noted that the V passage timing monitoring process and the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning hole switch/status monitoring process are necessary for a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine (1 + 2 types machine) such as this embodiment, and a normal 1 type pachinko It may not be necessary for the machine.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. The cheating & winning monitoring process is executed at steps A2003, A2005 and A2007 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The fraud & winning monitoring process includes the lower large winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, the winning opening switch in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2 switch 37a). ). As for the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) and the big winning opening (special variable winning devices 38, 39), it is easy for fraud to be forced to open the opening/closing member, insert game balls, and pay out prize balls. Therefore, in addition to detecting prizes, fraud is monitored.

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period in which the winning opening switch to be monitored for error does not detect the game ball. It is a period other than the game state.

Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the fraudulent winning number after addition is used to determine fraudulent occurrence for monitoring. It is determined whether or not the number (for example, 5) is equal to or more (A2105).

The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball passes the effective period of the count switch. This is to avoid judging that the game is fraudulent when the player wins a prize or the signal contains noise, and to prevent the player from easily judging an error even though the game is not fraudulent.

Then, if the number is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of fraudulent prize winnings is kept at the fraudulent occurrence determination number (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent prize winning notification timer area. (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraudulent occurrence command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent prize occurrence flag as a fraudulent flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and sets the number of winning balls. Counter update processing is executed (A2111). The details of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

Then, the game control device 100 loads target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not update of the notification timer is permitted (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the illegality & winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, when there are two winning opening switches in one special variable winning device (large winning opening), the update of the notification timer is permitted if one of the winning opening switches is subject to error monitoring, and is subject to error monitoring. is not allowed if the winning slot switch is the other. As a result, the update of the notification timer is performed twice as frequently as to the fraudulent notification of one special variable prize winning device, preventing time-up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired terminates the illegality & prize-winning monitoring process. In addition, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target unauthorized cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A2116). , prepares an illegal winning cancellation flag as an illegal flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

When the game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process of this time, clears the target number of illegal winnings (A2119).

In addition, after the process of step A2119 is completed, or if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), the game control device 100 detects the illegality & winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in step A2120, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area.

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. In addition, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the effect command is set. Processing is executed (A2122). After that, the illegality & prize-winning monitoring process is terminated.

By the above processing, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of fraud, the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning number counter update process. Winning number counter update processing is executed in step A2009 of the winning opening switch/state monitoring processing shown in FIG. 11 and step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring processing shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is stopped (A2201). It can be determined that the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (safety device activation flag=1) or when a strong error 2 requiring the game to be stopped occurs.

When the game is not stopped (the result of A2201 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2202), and there is an input to the target winning opening switch. (A2203). In the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, the number of winning balls, the address of the winning number counter area 1, the address of the winning number counter area 2, etc. are defined for each winning opening switch to be monitored. If there is no input (result of A2203 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2215), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

On the other hand, the game control device 100 loads the number of acquired game balls from the acquired game ball number area (A2204) when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2203 is "Y"), and the target winning The number of prize balls corresponding to the mouth switch is added to the number of acquired game balls (A2205), and the value after the addition is saved in the number of acquired game balls area (A2206). As a result, the number of acquired game balls stored in the number of acquired game balls area is updated for each winning opening switch, and the number of acquired game balls finally becomes the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption. Become.

The won game ball number area is located in the work area within the area, and is written by the program for updating the number of winning counters (a part of the program inside the area), and the program for the difference ball confirmation process described later (a part of the program outside the area). ) will only read out. Since the total value of prize balls is less than 255 (1 byte) even if all the winning hole switches are inputted at the same time, the upper limit is not checked for the number of winning game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the target win number counter area 1 (A2207), and updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value causes an overflow (A2209). Winning number counter area 1 has a size of 2 bytes (0 to 65535).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in winning number counter area 1 (A2210). After the processing of step A2210 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the value of target win number counter area 2 is loaded (A2211).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2212), and determines whether the updated value causes an overflow (A2213). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2213 is "N"), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 2 (A2214). Winning number counter area 2 has a size of 1 byte (0 to 255).

The game control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record after the processing of step A2214 is finished or when an overflow occurs (result of A2213 is "Y") (A2215). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has ended (A2216).

If the monitoring of all the switches has not ended (the result of A2216 is "N"), the game control device 100 returns to the processing of step A2203 to determine whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2216 is "Y"), the win number counter update process is completed. As a result, the processing of steps A2203-A2216 is repeated until the monitoring of all switches is completed, and the number of won game balls, which is the number (total) of prize balls obtained within one interruption, is obtained. Winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to each winning opening (each winning area), and winning information is stored.

When the game is stopped (the result of A2201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does nothing and terminates the win number counter update process. As a result, when the game is stopped, the detection of the game ball by the winning port switch is disabled, the number of acquired game balls is not updated, and the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are not updated. No ball is obtained (not paid out). Note that the payout of prize balls based on the winning information stored before the game is stopped (that is, when the detection of the game ball by the winning port switch is effective) continues even in the game stop state.

The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 200, and the payout command has not yet been transmitted. Winning data corresponding to the missing prize balls is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls generated by winning a prize in the winning opening (scheduled number of payouts) reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter for each number of prize balls set for each prize opening (for example, 3 prize balls, 2 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). An area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning to the winning opening. The winning number counter area 1 (2 bytes) is assigned a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 (1 byte) so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine status check process is executed at steps A2012, A2014, etc. in the winning opening switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2301). The state scan counter is set to a value ranging from 0 to 3 corresponding to the game state. Incidentally, the relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is ON (A2302). If the signal to be checked is not ON (the result of A2302 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2303), and the target state OFF command is acquired. and prepare (A2304). Furthermore, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2305). The state-off flag indicates a normal state with respect to error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch state with respect to touch switch signals.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is ON (the result of A2302 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a state ON flag as a state flag (A2306), acquires the target state ON command, prepares (A2307). Furthermore, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2308). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for error-related signals, and indicates a touched state for touch switch signals.

When the processing of step A2305 or step A2308 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control region matches the acquired signal state (A2309). If they match (result of A2309 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2312. If they do not match (the result of A2309 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2310), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2311).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2312). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (A2313). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2313 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value - The value remains at 1 (A2314). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2315). If they match (the result of A2315 is "Y"), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2315 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2316). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2317), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state ON command is an error type command, the effect control device 300 is made to start error notification. As a state ON command for starting error notification to the effect control device 300, there is a command corresponding to a payout error (included in a weak error) related to the payout of game balls such as a shot ball running out error, an overflow error, and a payout error error. , commands for frame open errors (included in strong error 1) such as glass frame open error and body frame open error, and commands for frame radio wave fraud errors (included in strong error 2).

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area included in the intra-area work area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and the performance display device 152 through the drivers 150a and 150b (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and output it to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b. (A2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as game hall managers and attendants, even if the probability setting values are different, if the probability of a big hit (and the probability of a small hit) is the same, the probability setting value for display will be changed to the big hit probability ( and small hit probability) may be made the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1037. Subsequently, ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (amusement center internal management device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A2406). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being checked, the probability setting changing/confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409) when it is not the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "N"). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is +1 within the range in which the work set value in the work set value area (RAM 111c or register) can be obtained. Along with updating, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored. Note that if the work set value is 5 (probability set value 6) and is updated by +1, it is possible to return to the work set value 0 (probability set value 1). Therefore, the probability setting values 1 to 6 can be repeatedly updated by +1 and switched. Also, the possible range of the work setting value is, for example, 0 to 1 or 0 to 5 in the case of multi-step setting in which there are a plurality of probability setting values, but is only 0 in the case of one-step setting. In the case of multi-step setting, the work setting value and the probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of single-step setting, the values remain the same even if they are updated. Yes (updated to the same value).

Also, every time the probability setting value is updated by +1, or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc., even if a command (setting value information command) that informs the setting value to the effect control device 300 is transmitted. good. Similarly, every time the probability set value is updated by +1, or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state or the like, the test signal may be output to an external test-firing test device. It should be noted that these transmissions and outputs are preferably stopped when there is an abnormality such as a main abnormality in the game control device 100 . In addition, when there is a change in the game state such as a probability variable state, a time saving state or a big hit state, or at the start of a special figure fluctuation display game, a command (set value information command) that informs the setting value to the production control device 300 is transmitted. Alternatively, the test signal may be output to an external test-fire test device.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. A probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (result of A1039 is "Y"), setting for work is performed. A value corresponding to the working set value in the value field may be stored in the probability set value field for the first time. In this way, when a power failure occurs during setting change (the result of A1040 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, production control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2600). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the entry of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V winning opening) is executed (A2601). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the upper big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, it corresponds to the special game processing number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in the register (A2605). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made by the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, To perform the special figure normal processing to set the information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is mentioned later.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. During figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure fluctuation process, set the necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and set the processing number "2" related to the special figure display process Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a special figure displaying process for setting information necessary for shifting to the big hit state or the small hit state ( A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, and the special figure normal processing Set the processing number "0" related to and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win, set necessary information such as a small win fanfare command and the time before opening the small win, and set the processing number "3" related to the small win opening preprocessing to set the special figure. Save in the game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small winning pre-opening process (A2611). For example, in the small winning opening preprocessing, the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning (small winning opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and saved in the upper big winning opening solenoid output data area. On-data is saved, a command during opening of a small win is set as a performance command, a processing number "4" relating to processing during opening of a small win is set, and saved in a special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes processing during opening of the small hit (A2612). For example, in the small hit open process, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball process is set, and the special figure Save in the game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small hit remaining ball processing (A2613). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2614), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2615). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2616), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2617). Next, a lever solenoid control process (A2618) for controlling the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b is executed so as to open the lever solenoid 86b during the small hit, and the special figure game process is ended.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning to the starting winning port 36. (A2703). When there is no winning to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the starting prize winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the right-handed game state (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if the gaming state is to hit to the right (the result of A2704 is "Y"), a right hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 with a left-handed hit, and a right-handed hit in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 does not win a prize. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state ), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 sends a right-handed instruction (warning) to the display device 41 etc. by right-handed instruction display. Run with

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no winning to the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). If the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined in A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is the upper limit value (here 4) Determine whether it is less than (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (4 here) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (number of special figures 1 pending or special figures 2 pending number) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot pattern random number of the special figure variation display game started by detecting the start switch to be monitored is extracted and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2910). Subsequently, the small winning design random number of the special figure fluctuation display game started by the detection of the start opening switch to be monitored is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area (A2911). In addition, the support winning symbol random number for determining the time saving pattern is extracted, and the support winning symbol random number is saved in the support winning symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the big win is surely generated by the V winning after the small win, so the small win symbol random number need not be used, and step A2911 is an option and may not be executed. In addition, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variation display game, if the starter switch to be monitored is the starter 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract the small hit symbol random number.

In addition, the small hit design random number, the support per design random number, and the big hit design random number are the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) described later. It is used to determine a stop pattern number at the time of a support hit or a stop pattern number at the time of a big win, and a small hit stop pattern pattern corresponding to these stop pattern numbers, a support hit stop pattern pattern or a big win stop pattern pattern.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid confusion, the small winning symbol random number, the support winning symbol random number, and the big winning symbol random number are provided independently. ) are shared, and the small hit pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the small hit, the small hit stop pattern pattern), the support pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the support hit, the support stop pattern pattern), the big hit pattern (at the time of the big hit) Stop symbol number, jackpot stop symbol pattern) may be sorted. That is, when determining a small winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each small winning pattern, or when determining a support winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each supporting winning pattern. Alternatively, when determining a jackpot pattern, the range of common random numbers may be divided and assigned to each jackpot pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2913), and determines the result (game result) of the variation display game in advance. Hold information determination processing (pre-determination processing, prefetch processing) is executed (A2914). In the special drawing reservation information determination process, stop design information (jackpot stop design, small hit stop design, time-saving stop design) Prefetching stop symbol command corresponding to the lost stop symbol) and the first half variation number (pre-reach variation number) and the second half variation number (post-reach variation number) based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 Pre-reading variation corresponding to Set the pattern command as a production command. Then, prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting mouth switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2915), execute the production command setting process (A2916), common to the special figure start mouth switch End the process. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes preliminary determination means capable of determining in advance the result of the variable display game before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a small hit is in progress (A3001). If the special game process number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. If it is during a small hit (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the condition device is in operation (A3002). If the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the conditional device is in operation.

When the condition device is not in operation (result of A3002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). A conditional device indicating that the conditional device is in operation when there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, when there is a winning (V winning) in the specific area 86 The operating information is saved in the conditional device operating information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends.

If it is not a small hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), if the condition device is in operation (the result of A3002 is "Y"), or if there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is " N"), and terminates the specific area switch monitoring process without doing anything.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the role item normal process of the role item game process described later is in progress and the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (A3200). If the character item is not being processed normally, or if the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3215 without starting the special figure variation display game.

The game control device 100 is in the normal process of the accessory, and when the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (the result of A3200 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number ) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3211 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares the customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs effect command setting processing (A3214), and proceeds to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3211 is "Y"), set "0" relating to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215), special figure game processing number The process number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) as an effect command (A3203), and execute the effect command setting process (A3204). Then, the processing shift setting processing during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure usual processing is terminated.

In the special figure 2 processing transition setting process, set "1" as the processing number, save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area, clear the customer waiting demonstration flag area, special figure 2 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reserved number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), and the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) as an effect command (A3208), and execute the effect command setting process (A3209). Then, the processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure usual processing is ended.

In the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of special figure 1, "1" is set as the processing number, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority digestion). That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game. In addition, when the special figure 1 change display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 2 change display game, the determination of step A3201 is performed by special figure 1 reservation number ≠ 0 It suffices to determine whether or not

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process is executed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process, the stop pattern number at the time of losing, the support hit, or the big hit, and the losing stop pattern pattern corresponding to this stop pattern number, the support hit stop pattern pattern, or the big hit stop pattern pattern are saved. do. The stop symbol number at the time of the support win or the big win is determined corresponding to the support win symbol random number and the big win symbol random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure pending number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrease by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. Figure 22 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 21 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3601 with the big hit information. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is "N"), optionally, based on the obtained big hit random number value, whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit is executed (A3607), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3608). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this time saving result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

If the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3608 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601. (A3609), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game is not a support hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "support hit (time saving hit)", and "lose", and there is no "minor hit". It should be noted that steps A3607-A3609 are provided as an option, these may be omitted and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game may not be provided with "support per (time reduction per)". Also, it is possible to provide a "small hit" as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since the big hit and the support hit do not overlap, the support hit information may be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 23 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value, small hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not it is a small hit (A3704).

When the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. is overwritten and saved (A3706), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure variation display game is a support hit based on the acquired big hit random number value. is executed (A3707), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3708). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this specific result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

When the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. (A3709), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (A3707) is not a support hit (the result of A3708 is "N"), optionally the prepared big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. A big hit determination process for determining whether or not may be executed (A3710). When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is a big hit (the result of A3711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3712) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is not a big hit (the result of A3711 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is finished while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of "small hit", "sapo hit (time saving hit)", and "loss". It is also possible to provide a "jackpot" as a result of the two-variation display game.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the small win information is saved in the small win flag 2 area, and the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area. , small hit information and support hit information may be saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3604, A3710) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing and the like will be described. FIG. 25A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3800), sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3801), and if the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, It is determined whether or not there is (A3802). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. The upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a loss (other than a jackpot) as the judgment result (A3804), and ends the jackpot judgment processing. do.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit determination value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the decision result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3805). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3900), and determines whether the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value. Judge (A3901). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. The small hit upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (ordinary probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the judgment of the small hit, but the configuration of providing the unique small hit random number is also possible.

When the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3903), End the determination process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is the small hit upper limit judgment value It is determined whether or not it is greater than (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, in the present embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability is another value It's okay.

[Support hit determination process]
Next, the details of the support hit determination processing (A3607, A3707) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 25C is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. In addition, the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in the special figure pending information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the support per upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A7001). Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (A7002), and it is judged whether or not the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7003). It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number coincides with the support hit determination value corresponding to the set probability value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. In the following cases, it is determined to be a support hit. In addition, the per support upper limit judgment value may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game will be a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of the support hit judgment value (the lower limit judgment value per support and the upper limit judgment value per support) Between) does not overlap with the range of the aforementioned big hit determination value and small hit determination value. In this embodiment, the random number for the support hit is not provided independently, and the random number for the support hit is used to determine the hit for the support.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A7003 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a failure (other than the support hit) as the judgment result (A7005), and sets the support hit. End the determination process.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A7003 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value. is determined (A7004). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A7004 is "Y"), the determination result is set to be off (other than support hit) (A7005). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A7004 is "N"), the support hit is set as the judgment result (A7006). When the determination result is set, the support hit determination process is terminated.

In the support hit determination process, support hit determination (time reduction determination) is performed by a lottery using a big hit random number value. In the support hit judgment (time reduction judgment) as a lottery, when the big hit random number matches the support hit judgment value (time reduction judgment value), the result of the support hit result (time reduction result, specific result) is obtained and the time reduction is set. be. The support hit determination value is different from the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value.

In addition, in order to make a difference, the probability of winning per support (range of judgment value for support per hit / range of random numbers for jackpot) may be different for each probability setting value, and for convenience, support for each probability setting value The winning probabilities may be the same. Set the winning probability per support so that setting 1 (or low setting side) is easy to win per support, setting 6 (or high setting side) is difficult to win per support, and the disadvantages of low setting are set. It may be relaxed, or it may be set on the contrary to meet the expectation of the player who expects that it is easy to win the support hit on the high setting side. Also, the winning probability per support may be changed monotonously from setting 1 to setting 6, or may not be monotonous, such as changing every two stages of setting. The odd-numbered setting and the even-numbered setting may have different winning probabilities per supporter to increase the player's interest in estimating the probability set value.

In addition, the winning probability of the support may be differentiated between the low probability of the jackpot probability (other than during the variable probability state) and the high probability (during the variable probability state), or may be the same for simplification. Even if you set the winning probability per support so that it is easy to win during low probability (other than during variable probability state) and difficult to win during high probability (during variable probability state), even if you mitigate the disadvantage during low probability Alternatively, it may be set to match the expectation of a player who expects that he/she can easily win the support prize during a high probability. For example, the winning probability for the supporter may be set so that the winning for the supporter is won only during the low probability (the winning probability for the supporter is zero during the high probability), and the disadvantage during the low probability may be alleviated.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may have different winning probabilities per support for sharpness, or may be the same for convenience. For example, in order to increase the support hit in the general electric support state (time saving state and probability variable state), the winning probability of the support hit in the special figure 2 variable display game may be made larger than the special figure 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to improve the interest of the game in the normal game state, the probability of winning per support in the special figure 1 variation display game may be made higher than in the special figure 2 variation display game. In short, the probability of winning per support in one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is set to zero, and the support hit only in the other special figure variation display game. may occur.

When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is the support hit result (time saving result), the stop symbol (stop symbol number, stop A time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern pattern) is set as a pattern pattern), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special figure fluctuation display game. That is, in this case, it suddenly becomes a time-saving state without going through a big hit (suddenly time-saving). Also, in this case, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the time saving pattern is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the time saving pattern (decorative time saving pattern) is displayed as the decoration stop pattern by the production control device 300 in the display device 41. .

The time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 include, for example, "1, 1, 3" in which only the left symbol and the middle symbol are aligned. There are no restrictions on time-saving patterns if they are decided in advance, but there are regularities such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right patterns are aligned. However, it is preferable because it is easy for the player to remember. A plurality of time saving patterns may be prepared, and the number of special figure fluctuation display games in which the time saving state continues (time saving number of times) may be determined for each time saving pattern.

The lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) in the case of the time saving result (time saving pattern), unlike the case of the big hit result or the small hit result. do. For example, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red in the case of a big hit result or a small hit result, and in the case of a time saving result (time saving pattern), a neutral color such as green or blue Light may be emitted in a color system or a cool color system (that is, a color other than a warm color system). Moreover, it will be in a light-extinguishing state in the case of a deviation. Therefore, when a time-saving pattern is displayed as a stop pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a big win has occurred, and the player can easily grasp that the winning time is short.

In addition, if the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability state) reaches a predetermined number of times (so-called ceiling number of times, short-time ceiling), even if you do not win the support Enter a time-saving state (play time). At this time, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 are turned off, and if a small win or a big win, they emit light in a warm color. At this time, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light as a fourth pattern in a cold color in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the time-saving state is entered unless a small win or a big win is made. . The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, the special figure display device or the display device 41 displays a missing pattern (a time saving pattern may be used) or a small hit pattern (if it is a small hit without a V prize) as a stop pattern, and the next special figure fluctuation display game. Enter the short-time state from. In this case, the time saving pattern displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, "3, 3, 5" in which only the left pattern and the middle pattern are aligned ("1, 1, 3", which is the same as in the case of time saving due to the support hit result). ) and so on.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001). When the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (result of A4001 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4003), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area of RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4007), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area (A4008). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether or not the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A4011). If the support per flag 1 is per support (the result of A4011 is "Y"), load a random number from the pattern random number storage area per special figure 1 (reservation number 1) (A4012), per special figure 1 support A pattern table is set (A4013). Then, referring to the special figure 1 per support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4014). Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4015). Thereafter, time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4016), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (A4017). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), and when the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (the result of A4011 is "N"), The stop design number is saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (A4018), and the lost stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4019). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020. It should be noted that if the process (A3607-A3609) related to the support hit in the jackpot flag 1 setting process is not executed, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), without executing steps A4011-A4017 , to step A4018.

After steps A4010, A4017, and A4019, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 1 command as a production command in a decoration special figure 1 command area (A4020 ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4021). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4022), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4023). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process is terminated. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, lost symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 1 indicator 51.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, whether or not the small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A4101). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the big hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (A4103), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area of RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball wins V by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win, so the special figure 2 variable display game is a small win. Even if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, the big hit pattern random number is loaded. However, it is also possible to load the small winning design random number (A2911) and acquire the stop design number corresponding to the small winning design random number. In this configuration, when the V prize is won (when the result of A3003 in FIG. 19 becomes "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded, the stop symbol number is acquired, and the processing from step A4107 to A4110 is executed. good.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. In the case of a small hit, a special figure 2 small hit stop design information table may be used instead of the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table. Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the RWM special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A4107), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area (A4108). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol BG to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 2 is not a small win (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big win flag 2 is a big win, that is, the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area. (A4111). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4102 and later, but the special figure 2 big hit pattern table and the special figure 2 big hit stop pattern information table that are different from the case of the small hit may be used.

When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (A4112). When the support per flag 2 is per support (the result of A4112 is "Y"), load the random number from the special figure 2 per support pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4113), and the special figure 2 per support A pattern table is set (A4114). Then, referring to the special figure 2 per support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4115). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4116), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( A4117). Thereafter, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4118), and the process proceeds to step A4121.

The game control device 100 determines that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N"), and the support hit flag 2 is a support. If it is not hit (the result of A4112 is "N"), save the stop design number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop design number area (A4119), and save the losing stop design pattern in the stop design pattern area (A4120). . After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "big hit" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the process of step A4111 is optional and need not be executed. That is, when the big hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the process of step A4112 may be performed without executing step A4111.

After steps A4110, A4118, and A4120, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 2 command as a production command in a decoration special figure 2 command area (A4121 ). By the above processing, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4122). The decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4123), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4124). ). In addition, when the small hit design random number (A2911) is extracted, the special figure 2 small hit design random number storage area (for reservation number 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special figure 2 stop design setting processing is ended. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, lost symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 2 display device 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning port 36, and the normal variable winning device 37 detects the game ball. A variable display game executing means for executing a special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing are explained. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like. In addition, based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, etc., the variation may be directly distributed.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, set the first half fluctuation group selection offset table (A4203), and acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop pattern pattern (A4204) .

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4208). Next, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. End the process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, prepares (A4302), and selects the target variation pattern random number The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not lost (the result of A4304 is "N"), sorting processing (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding (for formula 1) to load the variation pattern random number 2 and prepare (A4308). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) 3 is loaded and ready (A4314). After that, sorting processing (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half defines only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is lost), the sorting value "0", that is, the code for no sorting is specified at the top. .

Then, if the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404), and the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then a new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the sorting process (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The game control device 100 first selects the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the leading data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation A first distribution value specified in the group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the sorting value obtained in step A4503 from the random numbers prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3). Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), the address of the next sorting value is updated (A4506), and then the process proceeds to step A4503. The following processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (A4600a). If the variation display game to be started is not a special figure 2 variation display game but a special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), clear the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 ( A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value (A4606), and saves the added value (total variable time value) in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, -1 update the special figure pending number corresponding to the variation pattern discrimination flag indicating the variation pattern to be started (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (A4611), the random number storage area corresponding to the variation pattern discrimination flag address is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

First, when the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big win. It is determined whether or not (A4600b). When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the processing after step A4601 in the same way as when the variation display game to be started is the special figure 1 variation display game to run. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is per support, the configuration may be such that the processing after step A4601 is executed.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a losing result, A fluctuation time value (total fluctuation time value) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation count (execution number of special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4615).

Therefore, the fluctuation time value of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are not fixed and set by sorting (lottery), The variation time value of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is a fixed time value set for each special figure 2 variation number after the end of the big hit. That is, the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is subjected to rotation speed control. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win to be a fixed time value.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation time value as an effect command (A4616), and executes the processing after step A4610.

It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity open pattern) related to the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the fluctuation time value is the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit In addition, it may be set corresponding to the support state.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command including information about a pattern is mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure fluctuation.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 is being changed (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A4801). If the special figure 2 is not changing, that is, if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (the result of A4801 is "N"), set the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4802).

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit when the special figure 2 is fluctuating (the result of A4801 is "Y") (A4803) . If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stop symbol (stop display) that is the result of the variable display game. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is per support, it may be configured to move to the processing of step A4802.

If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a small hit or a big hit, that is, if the result of A4803 is "N"), the game control device 100 displays the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the big hit (special figure 2 The display time corresponding to the number of executions of the variable display game) is set (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are not fixed based on the stop pattern pattern set by lottery, The display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is fixedly set for each special figure 2 variation number (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game) after the end of the big hit. It should be noted that it is also possible to fix the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit.

In addition, as described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern) related to the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special figure 2 fluctuation after the end of the big hit It may be set corresponding to not only the number of times but also the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special figure game processing timer area (A4805). Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during general electricity support (during the time saving state) (A4806). If the general electric power is not being supported (the result of A4806 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813. If it is during general electricity support (the result of A4806 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A4807). If it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4807 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4810.

If the game control device 100 is a variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4807 is "N"), the time reduction variation number 2 is updated by -1 (decrease by 1) (A4808), and the time reduction variation It is determined whether or not the number of times 2 is 0 (A4809). When the time reduction variation number 2 is 0 (result of A4809 is "Y"), the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of time reduction is executed (A4812).

Game control device 100, when the number of times of shortening fluctuations 2 is not 0 (the result of A4809 is "N"), updates the number of times of shortening fluctuations 1 by -1 (reduces only 1) (A4810), the number of times of shortening fluctuations 1 is 0 (A4811). If the time reduction variation count 1 is not 0 (the result of A4811 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813. On the other hand, when the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (the result of A4811 is "Y"), the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of time reduction is executed (A4812). After that, an effect mode information check process, which will be described later, is executed (A4813).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a process shift setting process during special figure display (A4814). In the special figure displaying process shift setting process, the process number "2" related to the special figure displaying process is set, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area, and the special figure 1 indicator 51 is related to the fluctuation stop. The stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. After that, the process during special figure fluctuation ends.

[Time saving end setting processing]
Next, the details of the time saving end setting process (A4812) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal relating to the time saving end in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal related to the time saving end is off data of the big hit 2 signal. As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 .

In addition, in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is very short or the winning probability of the normal pattern variable display game is very low, so there is no winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 and the second start memory is does not occur. For this reason, when the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 hold) remains as a remaining hold at the time of the time saving end, the output of the on data of the jackpot 2 signal is continued (in this way ), when the variable display of the special figure variable display game related to the last remaining hold stops, the off data of the two jackpot signals (signal related to the time saving end) may be output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of RWM (A4902). As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as a test signal to the test-firing test apparatus. The signal related to the time saving end here is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, normal electric role They are OFF data of the object 1 open extended state signal and OFF data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area of RWM (A4903), save the low probability & no time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area of RWM (A4904), RWM special game Save special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the mode flag area (A4905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the RWM time reduction variation frequency 1 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 1 is stored (A4906), and the RWM time reduction variation frequency 2 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 2 is stored. is cleared (A4907). Then, the signal related to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4908), and the number in the state of hitting to the left is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area of the RWM (A4909).

Thereafter, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (A4910). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating a normal game state, which is a period during which a base value (ball output rate in a normal game state) is calculated. After that, the time saving end setting process is terminated.

Thus, by executing the time saving end setting process, appropriately from the time saving state (state with low probability of special figure and general electricity support) to normal game state (state without special figure low probability and general electricity support) can be transferred.

[Production mode information check process]
Next, the details of the production mode information check process (A4813) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of effect mode information check processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and the effect mode is selected to continue until the next big hit, for example.

In addition, when the next mode transition information is not an update no code (the result of A5001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the executable number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode. is updated by -1 (A5002), and it is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for the effect has become 0 (A5003). Here, the number of rotations remaining in the effect is updated by -1 only when the main special figure variation display game is executed this time, but is also updated by -1 when it is not the main variation display game. Configurations are also possible.

One of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is determined as the main variation display game according to the game state and the like. For example, the main variation display game (main variation display game) is the one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that is frequently executed, and the variation display game that is not the main variation display game (secondary variation display Game) is the one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that is not frequently executed. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the effect control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating a main variable display game according to the game state or the like.

If the effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the production becomes 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), that is, when the production mode is shifted from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (A5004). , acquires the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred, saves it in the production mode number area in the RWM (A5006), and acquires the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be transferred. Then, it is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A5007), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

In addition, when the production mode is shifted by the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the specified remaining number of reservations (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining pending number is the number of special figure 2 pending (remaining pending) that is digested after the time saving state ends, and is the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the time saving ends. Remaining suspension is caused by winning a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 that is opened by a normal game hit during the time saving state. In this way, it is possible to set the remaining reservation digestion mode (FIG. 54) as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory).

Alternatively, when the production mode is transferred when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 opened by the normal game in the time saving state (corresponding to the latter half opening described later) is completed, the production of the production mode to be transferred remains. You may set the number of rotations (initial value) to the special figure 2 reservation number at that time. As a result, after the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is opened by the normal game in the time saving state, is completed, the mode after the normal electric open end (Fig. 71A) is set as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 pending. Can be set. Furthermore, in this case, the number of production remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted by the end of the time saving state (time reduction fluctuation number 1 or 2 = 0) is a predetermined value according to the number of times of time saving (for example, the number of times of saving time from 6 subtracted value) to set the pre-commercial power disconnection mode (FIG. 71A).

Furthermore, when the production mode is switched by the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the special figure 2 reservation number at that time or It may be set to a predetermined number below the special figure 2 reservation number. In this way, as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation number or the predetermined number of remaining reservations (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory) at the end of time saving, the remaining reservation digestion mode (Fig. 71B) can be set. The number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode that transitions after the time-saving occurrence remaining hold digestion mode, and the number of remaining holds digested in the time-saving occurrence remaining hold digestion mode from the prescribed remaining hold number (for example 10) Can be set to the subtracted value (excess pending number). In this way, it is possible to set the excessive retention digestion mode (FIG. 71B) as a production mode after the time saving during the occurrence residual retention digestion mode.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on the presence or absence of time saving, and information on the production mode) corresponding to the newly set production mode number as a production command (A5009). , determines whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (result of A5010 is "Y"), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (result of A5010 is "N"), save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5011 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A5013), and executes an effect command setting process (A5014). Thereby, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 can acquire the production|presentation remaining rotation speed. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count 2 is prepared as an effect command (A5015), and effect command setting processing (A5016) is executed. Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the time shortening variation frequency 2 . In addition, the game control device 100 may similarly prepare the time reduction variation number 1 as an effect command and execute the effect command setting process.

Next, when the new effect mode number is acquired in step A5006, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (A5017), and if it is not the left-handed mode (The result of A5017 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A5017 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5018), the effect command setting process is executed (A5019), and the effect mode End the information check process.

In addition, in the above, regardless of the determination result (A5003) as to whether or not the remaining number of rotations in the production is 0, the number of production rotations command corresponding to the updated remaining number of rotations in the production (A5002) and the updated time A time shortened variation count command corresponding to the shortened variation counts 1 and 2 (A4808, A4810) may also be prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during special figure display. FIG. 36A shows the first half of the processing during special figure display, and FIG. 36B shows the second half of the processing during special figure display.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (A5101). That is, it is determined whether or not the display of the stop symbol (stop display) is related to the special figure 1 variable display game. If the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (the result of A5101 is "Y"), load the jackpot flag 1 (A5102), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (A5103), and load the jackpot flag 1 is a big hit (A5104).

When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation in the condition device operation information area. (A5105), the process proceeds to step A5106. When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5111.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a special figure normal process transition setting process (A5106). In the special figure normal processing shift setting process, 0 is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the fluctuation symbol determination flag area is cleared. After that, the processing during special figure display is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 loads the big hit flag 2 (A5107) and clears the big hit flag 2 area ( A5108). It is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5109). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A5109 is "Y"), the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5110), and the processing of step A5106 transition to If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5109 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit or a loss, the process moves to step A5111.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the processing from step A5107 to A5110 is optional and need not be executed. That is, after step A5101, the processing of step A5111 may be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the special figure high probability (during the variable probability state) (A5111). When not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5111 is "N"), whether there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed has reached the ceiling number (time saving ceiling) Determine (A5112).

If there is no ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the ceiling counter value of the RWM ceiling counter area by +1 (increases by 1) (A5113). Then, whether the number of times the special figure variation display game (including the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game) has been executed in a state other than the probability variation state (that is, the ceiling counter value) has reached the ceiling number of times is determined (A5114). For example, the ceiling count is 500 times. When the ceiling number of times is reached (the result of A5114 is "Y"), the ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs and the ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached are set (on) (A5115 ). In addition, it is also possible to configure the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag collectively as one flag.

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a big win occurs, but is not cleared unless a big win occurs. Therefore, once reaching the ceiling number of times, if the time saving number of times ends without hitting the jackpot, the ceiling reached flag remains set (on), henceforth, the ceiling time saving will not occur, and the ceiling The counter value is also not updated.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in the special figure high probability (in the probability variable state) (the result of A5111 is "Y"), if there is a ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "Y"), the number of times of ceiling (The result of A5114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (A5116).

Next, when the small win flag 2 indicates a small win (the result of A5116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a small win fanfare command as a production command (A5117), and executes production command setting processing. (A5118). Then, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded as a production command from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (A5119), and the production command setting process is executed (A5120). After that, a small hit opening pre-processing shift setting process is executed (A5121), and the process during special figure display is ended.

In the small hit opening pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number related to the small hit opening pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the time before the small winning opening (for example, 300 ms) is set as a special figure. Save in the game processing timer area. In addition, a signal relating to the start of a small winning game (for example, turning on a signal for big winning 1 (output with a big winning and a small winning)) is saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit, that is, if the result of A5116 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs. (A5122). If there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (the result of A5122 is "Y"), save the initial value that will be the ceiling time saving number (time saving number of times due to ceiling time saving) in the time reduction fluctuation number 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 area (A5123 ). The initial values (for example, 704 times and 700 times) of the time reduction variation frequency 1 and the time reduction variation frequency 2 in the case of the ceiling time reduction described above are saved here. The initial value may be determined by lottery. Subsequently, in order to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving, support operation setting processing is executed (A5127), special figure normal processing transition setting processing is executed (A5128), and processing during special figure display is completed. In the special figure normal process shift setting process, the process number "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

Game control device 100, when there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that ceiling time reduction occurs (the result of A5122 is "N"), the support hit flag 2 determines whether or not support hit (A5124). Then, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A5124 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A5125).

If either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A5124 or A5125 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data to the time reduction variation count. 1 area and 2 areas for shortened variation count (A5126). The initial values (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) of the time reduction fluctuation number 1 and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 in the case of the support hit result (sudden time reduction) are saved here It will be. Subsequently, in order to generate a time-saving state (suddenly time-saving) by the time-saving design, the support operation setting process is executed (A5127), the special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the special figure displaying process is ended. .

In addition, the time reduction determination data is set corresponding to the stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503). The value (that is, the number of times of time saving) will be determined by lottery based on the pattern random numbers per support.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hit (the result of A5124 and A5125 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support operation setting process for setting the time saving, Usually, the process transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the process during special figure display is terminated.

As described above, in the processing during special figure display, setting of time saving such as setting of time saving number of times (that is, initial value of time saving variation number of times) is executed with respect to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving. In addition, time saving setting such as setting of the number of times of working hour saving is executed in the jackpot end processing with respect to time saving by the big hit, that is, time saving starting from the end of the big hit state.

In addition, the special figure display process is executed when the special figure game processing timer set by the stop display time (A4805) reaches 0 (A2604, A2610), so the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game It will be executed when the display ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game ends (substantially equal when starting the next special figure fluctuation display game if it starts), the number of time reduction fluctuations (A5123, A5126) is set, Time saving state due to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving starts.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5127) in the process during special figure display will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal relating to the time saving start in the external information output data area (A5301). As a result, at the sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, a signal related to time saving start is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (hall computer, etc.). Here, the signal related to the time saving start is the ON data of the big hit 2 signal. Then, the timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (A5302). This timer initial value becomes the time for outputting the big win 3 signal by the later-described external information editing process.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving start in the test signal output data area (A5303). As a result, at the start of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving, a signal relating to the start of time saving is output as a test signal to the test firing test device. The signal related to the time saving start here is, for example, the ON data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the normal symbol 1 variation ON data of the time shortening state signal and ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. Then, save the number with short working hours in the game state display number area (A5304), save the high probability & short working hours flag in the general game mode flag area (A5305), and save the special figure in the special game mode flag area A time saving flag is synthesized (A5306). Subsequently, a signal relating to right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5307), and a right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5308).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table corresponding to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (A5309), special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) or special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) The address of the table corresponding to the set effect mode transition information is acquired (A5310), and the effect mode number (number of effect mode) of the effect mode is acquired based on the table and saved (A5311). As a result, you can select the production mode that shifts to the beginning of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) based on the table (A5312). For example, the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) is the number of times of reduction in time (initial value of the number of times of reduction in time 1 or the number of times of reduction in time 2). Thereby, for example, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the next mode transition information, which is the information about the transition to the next mode of the performance mode during the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction, based on the table (A5313). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A5314), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5315 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5316). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A5317), and executes an effect command setting process (A5318). Then, the time reduction variation count command corresponding to each of the time reduction variation count 1 and the time reduction variation count 2 (here, the initial value of the time reduction count) is prepared as an effect command (A5319), and the effect command setting process is executed. (A5320).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5321), clears the effect mode transition information area (A5322), and ends the jackpot ending process. Moreover, here, since the ceiling time reduction has been activated, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored may be cleared.

[Accessory game processing]
Next, details of the accessory game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory game process. In the accessory game process, the overall process relating to the big win state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes a lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process (A5601). In the lower big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the value of the role product game processing timer by -1 (subtracts only 1) if it is not 0 (A5602). By updating -1, the accessory game processing timer counts the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the accessory game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the role game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the accessory game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the accessory game processing is terminated.

When the role game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 corresponds to the role game processing number. A role product game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in a register (A5604). Further, using the role product game sequence branch table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the role product game process number is obtained (A5605). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the accessory game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the accessory game processing number (A5606).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes the usual accessory processing for making settings for the start of the big win (A5607). For example, in the role product normal processing, in a predetermined case, the processing number "1" relating to the fanfare mid-process is set and saved in the role product game processing number area. The details of the accessory normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes processing during fanfare (A5608). For example, in the mid-fanfare process, the process number "2" relating to the mid-interval process is set and saved in the role game process number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes processing during the interval (A5609). For example, in the interval process, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the opening time of the lower grand prize opening is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the ON data is saved in the lower grand prize opening solenoid output data area, and the round command is issued. It is set as a performance command, a process number "3" relating to the process during jackpot opening is set, and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A5606, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the final round; During the big hit open processing for setting information necessary for performing the big hit remaining ball processing is executed (A5610). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set, a process number "4" relating to the jackpot remaining ball process is set, and saved in the role game process number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A5606, the game control device 100 sets the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round, A big hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is executed (A5611). For example, in the jackpot remaining ball processing, if the final round is not the last round, the interval time is saved in the role game processing timer area, and the processing number "2" relating to the processing during the interval is set and saved in the role game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the role product game processing timer area, the processing number "5" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the role product game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the character normal process (A5612). For example, in the jackpot end processing, based on the time reduction determination data including the information of the presence or absence of the time saving state after the jackpot end (with or without time saving), the electric power support state (time saving state) after the jackpot state is completed. Information is set, a process number "0" relating to the role product normal processing is set, and saved in the role product game processing number area.

[Routine processing of accessories]
Next, the details of the character product normal processing (A5607) in the aforementioned character product game processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the condition device is in operation (A5801). When the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004, A5005, A5010), that is, there is jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or the specific region 86 (V winning If there is a winning (input to the specific area switch 72, V winning), it can be determined that the condition device is in operation. If the conditional device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the usual character processing is terminated.

When the conditional device is in operation (result of A5801 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit area (A5802). Subsequently, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), the probability information command (normal medium) is prepared as an effect command (A5804), and the effect command setting process is executed. Execute (A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as an effect command (A5806), and executes effect command setting processing (A5807). Then, load the decoration special command (decoration special command 1 command or decoration special command 2 command) from the decoration special command area of the special command that became the big hit or small hit this time, prepare it as a production command (A5808), and produce Command setting processing is executed (A5809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). . Then, the initial value is saved in the round number area (A5812). The initial value is 0 when the conditional device is in operation according to the jackpot information, and is 1 when the conditional device is in operation due to winning in the specific area 86 (V winning).

Next, the game control device 100 executes processing transition setting processing during fanfare (A5813), and ends the normal processing for the accessory. For example, in the mid-fanfare process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number relating to the mid-fanfare process, the process number is saved in the role game process number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the role game process timer area. .

In the process transition setting process during the fanfare, the game control device 100 has a time shortening variation frequency 1 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 1 is stored, a time shortening variation frequency 2 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 2 is stored, and a ceiling counter value Clear the ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter area is stored, the ceiling time saving activation flag area where the ceiling time saving activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored. In addition, the normal low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area, and the special low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special game mode flag area. The ceiling counter area that stores the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in a state other than the probability variable state is cleared here when the big hit occurs. (RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on), it need not be cleared.

Furthermore, in the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, the game control device 100 turns on a signal related to the start of a big win (special game state) (for example, turns on a big win 1 signal (outputs with a big win and a small win), turns on a big win 4 signal (big win )) is saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation Time shortening state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (A5612) in the aforementioned accessory game processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data (A4009, A4109) is data with time reduction (A6001). Data with time saving indicates that it will be in a time saving state (general electric support state) after the end of the jackpot state. The data without time saving indicates that the time saving state (general electric support state) does not occur after the jackpot state ends.

When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting processing 1 in order to shift to the normal game state after the end of the big win (A6002), and the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction. In the case of data, a jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to a time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot ends (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6004), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information (A4010, A4110) set in the stop 1 symbol setting process or the stop 2 symbol setting process. (A6005), Acquire and save the production mode number (production mode number) of the production mode set after the end of the jackpot state (A6006). As a result, it is possible to select the performance mode to be shifted after the big hit is completed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) set after the end of the special game state (A6007). For example, the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) is the number of times of time saving (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) or the total number of times of time saving and the prescribed remaining number of reservations (for example, 10 times). Thereby, for example, after the big hit ends, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends or until all the special figure 2 variable display games related to the remaining reservation are executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about transition to the next mode of the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (A6009). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A6009), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6010 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the information of the production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A6012), and executes an effect command setting process (A6013). Then, prepare a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count (here, the initial value of the time reduction count, for example, 5 times or less or 99 times) as an effect command (A6014), and execute the effect command setting process (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the effect mode transition information area (A6016), executes the role item normal process transition setting process (A6017), and ends the jackpot end process. In the character object normal processing transition setting processing, in order to shift to the character object normal processing, the processing number "0" related to the character object normal processing is set, the processing number is saved in the character object game processing number area, and the condition device operation information is set. Clear the area and clear the time reduction judgment data area.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal off data, the jackpot 3 signal off data, and the jackpot 4 signal off data are output as external information. Save to data area. Since the jackpot end setting process 1 is a process when there is no time saving after the jackpot state ends, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game state display number 2 area as the display data of the second game state display portion 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6204), and saves the no special figure time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (A6205). Then, the time shortening fluctuation number area is cleared (A6206), and the number in the left-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 1 area as the display data of the first game state display section 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50. (A6207), end the jackpot end setting process 1.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the big win in the external information output data area (A6401), and saves a signal regarding the end of the big win in the test signal output data area (A6402). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device through the external information terminal 71, the OFF data of the jackpot 1 signal, the OFF data of the jackpot 3 signal, and the OFF data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404). Since the jackpot end setting process 2 is a process in the case of entering the time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot state ends, the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal related to the start of the time saving. (In this embodiment, since the 2 jackpot signals are output from the jackpot state, the ON state of the 2 jackpot signals continues).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number of time saving in the game state display number 2 area as the display data of the second game state display section 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6405), and A high probability flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6406), and a special figure time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A6407).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has become a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold has become a big hit (A6408 ). If the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit or if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit during the time saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), the stop pattern pattern ( Alternatively, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) corresponding to the stop pattern number (symbols A to F described later) is saved (A6409), and the processing after step A6411 is executed. Here, the time reduction variation count initial value (time reduction count) is the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). In addition, in step A6409, the initial value of the time reduction variation number 1 (the second predetermined number described later) is also saved in addition to the time reduction variation number initial value (time reduction number of times) for the time reduction variation number 2. For example, the initial value of the time shortening variation number 1 may be the initial value of the time shortening variation number 2 plus the maximum value (eg 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold becomes a big hit (the result of A6408 is "Y") , saves the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency (the number of time reductions, 99 here) in the time reduction variation frequency area (A6410). Also here, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) is the initial value of the number of times of reduction fluctuation 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). In addition, in step A6410, in addition to the time reduction variation frequency initial value (time reduction frequency) for the time reduction variation frequency 2, the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency 1 (second predetermined frequency described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time shortening variation number 1 may be the initial value of the time shortening variation number 2 plus the maximum value (eg 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number).

After that, the game control device 100 corresponds to the stop symbol pattern (or the stop symbol number, symbols AG described later), the support state (support mode, normal power open pattern) which is the state (mode) of the general electrical support ) is saved in the support status area (A6411). Note that the processing of step A6411 is an option, and is executed when the support state regarding the mode (content) of the general electricity support is variable, as in a modification example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 1 area as display data of the first game state display section 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50 (A6412), and A hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6413), an effect command setting process is executed (A6414), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the general electric winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

Game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already timed up, to the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, Execute normal pattern normal processing to set information necessary for performing processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later.

In addition, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 sets the normal pattern open time, and executes the normal pattern winning process. (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, a symbol variation control process relating to control of variation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal game processing timer value is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, if the time has not expired, the process from step A7614 onwards is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A7702). The gaming state for hitting to the right is a jackpot state and a time-saving state (general electric support state). If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the gaming state is not right-handed (result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes the notification (warning) to instruct left-handed hitting on the display device 41 or the like by left-handed instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). When the number of reserved normal patterns is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating (executing) or in a per normal pattern state. It is determined whether or not (A7706). When there is no change in the normal pattern fluctuation display game nor in the normal pattern per state (the result of A7706 is "N"), the normal pattern pending number is updated by +1 (A7707). In this way, the normal pattern suspension number is updated by +1 only when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not fluctuating or the normal pattern per state is not in effect. does not accumulate substantially and becomes 1 instantaneously only immediately before the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts (the normal pattern pending number is substantially 0).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the number of normal pattern reservations after the update (A7708). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (A7710), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), Alternatively, if the normal pattern variation display game is changing or in the normal pattern per state (the result of A7706 is "Y"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric prize switch monitoring process (A7602) in the general/universal diagram game process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general electric winning switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state and the normal variation prize winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). Then, when the game is in the middle of a regular game (the result of A7801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the count number of the general electric counter after the update has reached the upper limit (for example, 10) (A7804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM, and the normal hit end pointer value in the RWM is It is saved in the per figure middle control pointer area (A7805).

Finally, the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the general-purpose electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. That is, when there is a general electric winning prize equal to or greater than the upper limit value during the winning state of the general pattern, the winning end value is saved in the processing control pointer area during the general pattern winning at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed. It is made to end the hit state of the normal figure on the way.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the normal game (the result of A7801 is "N"), when it is determined that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N") ), or if it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit value (the result of A7804 is "N"), the electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal pattern normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved patterns is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per pattern of RWM. Load the per pattern random number from (for the number of reservations 1), and clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) after loading to 0 (A7902) ). In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A7903). In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers per hit is 0 to 250, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 251/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the normal pattern per probability in the low probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7904). , If it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 0) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A7905), step A7906 Go to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is, if the win is lost, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

When the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, in the case of losing, the game control device 100 saves the losing information in the winning flag area (A7908). Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), that is, if it is a winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A7911), and loads the loaded winning symbol random number. The corresponding winning stop symbol number is set (A7912), the winning stop symbol information corresponding to the winning stop symbol number is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In this case, there is one type of hit stop pattern (normal hit pattern), but there may be several types in a modified example which will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), and shifts the normal per pattern random number storage area. (A7916), after clearing the free space after the shift to 0 (A7917), update the number of general chart reservations by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 1 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared to 0, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1 and becomes 0.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the information of the support state (support mode, electric power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the processing of step A7919 is optional, and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable as in a modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal pattern game processing timer area (A7920). It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern), which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable, set a variable normal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support state and save it in the normal game processing timer area. And, during the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting processing is executed (A7921), the normal figure usual process is terminated. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal process (A7922). , the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A7923). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the general/universal diagram normal processing is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during normal pattern fluctuation. The process shift setting process during the normal pattern fluctuation is executed at step A7921 in the normal pattern normal process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern fluctuation processing (A8101), and saves the processing number in the normal pattern game processing number area (A8102).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (turns on the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A8103), and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating. The fluctuation flag indicating that is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (A8104). Then, save the flashing control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (A8105), and set the initial value (here, 0) to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern number area. Save (A8106). After that, the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7609) in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process during normal game display (A8301), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal pattern display time (normal pattern stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern game processing timer area ( A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal pattern fluctuation (turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (A8305), and the normal pattern fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (A7610) in the general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal processing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (A8403).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is set in the winning flag (the result of A8403 is "Y"), sets the processing setting table during the winning (A8404), and the winning corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information A start pointer value (here, 0) is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during normal per figure (A8405). In addition, it acquires the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information, and saves it in the normal pattern per end pointer area (A8406). Next, the general electric open time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. It should be noted that there is one type of hit normal pattern stop pattern (normal pattern per pattern), and the hit start pointer value, hit end pointer value, and general electric open time are fixed, but as in the modification described later, normal When the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the electric support is variable, a hit start pointer value, a hit end pointer value, and a general electric open time corresponding to the support state are set, and a general map game processing timer area is set. You can save to .

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the process number for shifting to the process during normal game per game (A8408), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8409). After that, save the signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern 1 hit signal is turned on) and the signal related to normal electric operation start (normal electric accessory 1 active signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A8410). Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid, ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8411).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the general electrical count area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), Clear the stored information in the electric fraudulent winning number area (A8413). Finally, a flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is not set in the winning flag (the result of A8403 is "N"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing (A8415). , the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A8416). After that, the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the common electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the processing during general map display is completed.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (A7611) during the normal pattern per game in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during normal per pattern.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal pattern hit (A8601), and the value of the loaded normal pattern hit middle control pointer is the upper limit value of the normal pattern hit middle control pointer (hit end pointer value). is reached (A8602).

Then, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "N") , the control pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, normal electric operation transition setting processing is executed (A8604), and processing during the normal pattern per is terminated. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "Y"), Without executing the process of updating (+1) the process control pointer area during the normal pattern hit in step A8603, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during the normal pattern hit ends.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal per normal process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

First, the game control device 100 branches the processing according to the value of the control pointer (the control pointer during normal game per game) (A8701). Here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step A8603. An example of a control pointer is shown in FIG. 73 below. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, so the wait after closing the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is performed. The time (universal electric interval time, eg, 60000 msec) is saved in the general/universal game processing timer area (A8702). It should be noted that when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern) related to the general electricity support is variable as in the modification described later, the wait time (the general electricity interval time) may be set corresponding to the support state. .

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets OFF data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation corresponding to the control pointer The general electric open time, which is the opening time of the winning device 37, is saved in the general game processing timer area (A8704). The electric current disconnection time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (for example, 3000 msec). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8705), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706, terminates the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37, and performs normal electric remaining ball processing (A7612). 4 is set as the process number (A8706), and the process number is saved in the general-purpose game process number area (A8707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8708). After that, in order to set the general electric solenoid 37c to OFF, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8709), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated. In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the later-described modified example, the normal electric remaining ball processing time may be set according to the support state.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the general electric remaining ball processing (A7612) in the general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric residual bulb processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "5" relating to the end process for a normal game (A8901), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8902). After that, the general pattern ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8903). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the modification described later, the general drawing ending time may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turns off the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the general electrical count area for counting the number of prizes awarded to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (A8905), and the general control pointer area during the normal pattern is cleared (A8906). After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A8907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the general pattern per end process (A7613) in the general pattern game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the per-universal pattern end process.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "0" relating to the normal game process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A9102). After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal pattern variation game (the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (fraud monitoring period during fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter, normal per pattern end processing. exit.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1319) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 54A and 54B are flowcharts showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 54A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 54B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information Information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal, a game hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device is created and processed to be set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (A9301). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9301 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9302). If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9302 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9303), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A9304).

Game control device 100, when the glass frame open error is occurring (the result of A9301 is "Y"), or when the body frame open error is occurring (the result of A9302 is "Y"), The ON data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9305), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9306).

After steps A9304 and A9306, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9307), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A9308). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102). processing A1046). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9308 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A9309), and proceeds to the process of step A9310. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9308 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnet fraud is occurring (A9310). If there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9310 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A9311). If there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio fraud is occurring.

If board radio fraud is not occurring (the result of A9311 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio fraud is occurring (A9312). If there is a frame radio wave fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9312 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not big winning mouth fraud is occurring (A9313). Incidentally, when a fraudulent prize winning occurrence flag relating to the big prize mouth is saved in the fraud flag area by the prize winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the big prize mouth fraud is occurring. If the big winning slot fraud is not occurring (the result of A9313 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the general electricity fraud is occurring (A9314). Incidentally, when the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the second starting winning port of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the fraud flag area by the winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the electric fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the vibration fraud is occurring (A9315) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9314 is "N"). Incidentally, when there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that the vibration fraud is occurring. If the vibration irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9315 is "N"), it is determined whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A9316). If the abnormal discharge flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the V passage error is occurring (A9317) when the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9316 is "N"). If the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passage error is occurring. If the V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9317 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (A9318). If the remaining ball error is not occurring (result of A9318 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the safety device is operating based on the safety device operating flag (A9319). If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9319 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9320).

The game control device 100 saves the OFF data of the game machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9321) when a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector is not occurring (the result of A9320 is "N"). . If a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9320 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9323).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when magnet fraud is occurring (result of A9310 is "Y"), when board radio fraud is occurring (result of A9311 is "Y"), frame radio wave fraud occurs. If it is in (the result of A9312 is "Y"), if the big winning entrance fraud is occurring (the result of A9313 is "Y"), if the electric fraud is occurring (the result of A9314 is "Y") ), if a vibration irregularity is occurring (the result of A9315 is "Y"), if an abnormal discharge error is occurring (the result of A9316 is "Y"), if a V passage error is occurring (A9317 (result of A9318 is "Y"), if a remaining ball error is occurring (result of A9318 is "Y"), if the safety device is in operation (result of A9319 is "Y"), security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A9322), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9323). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 . In this embodiment, the safety device is in operation when the safety device operation flag=1.

In this way, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322), and the person in charge or attendant of the game hall etc. can recognize that the safety device is in operation. In addition to the configuration in which the security signal is continuously output to the external device while the safety device is operating, it is also possible to output the security signal to the external device for only one pulse (e.g. 256 ms) when the safety device is activated. is. Also, instead of the security signal or in combination with the security signal, external information dedicated to the safety device may be provided, and the dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is in operation.

In addition, when the safety device is in operation (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the ON data of the game machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the game machine error state signal is used as the test signal by the test firing tester. output to A configuration is also possible in which the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the fact that the safety device is in operation is not output. Also, a test signal different from the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the test-firing test device.

After steps A9321 and A9323, the game control device 100 executes starting gate signal editing processing for editing the winning signal of the starting gate (A9324). Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9325), and the pattern confirmation number signal generated when the stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is decided is sent to the external device. The number of times of design decision signal editing processing to be output to is executed (A9326).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the time saving signal control timer is not 0 (A9327), and determines whether the time saving signal control timer is 0 (A9328). If the time saving signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9328 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time saving signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9328 is "N"), big hit 3 The ON data of the signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9329), and the external information editing process ends.

In this way, at the time of sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time reduction and time saving pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the big hit 3 signal is sent to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) External information Output via terminal 71 . Here, the ON data of the big hit 3 signal is output during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process. The conventional jackpot 1-4 signals are output during the jackpot period, but the jackpot 3 signal is output for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec) much shorter than the jackpot period. Therefore, the external device (hall computer, etc.) can recognize that the time reduction has occurred due to the ceiling time reduction due to the number of ceiling times or the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern without confusing it with the big win or the time reduction following the big win.

In addition, as described above, the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time in the jackpot state and the time saving state following the jackpot state (time saving state due to the jackpot, first specific game state, first time saving state). Output as external information. The short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) jackpot 3 signal is external information indicating the occurrence of a time saving state (second specific game state, second time saving state) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving state caused by a big hit It is output to the external device separately from the external information (2 long-time jackpot signals), and is not confused with the external device.

As another configuration, only one of the ceiling time saving and the sudden time saving may output three jackpot signals for a fixed time at the start of the time saving. In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of time saving, in one time saving, both the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output for a fixed time at the start of the time saving, and in the other time saving, the jackpot Only 3 signals may be output. For example, 3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals may be output for the ceiling time saving, and only 3 jackpot signals may be output for the sudden time saving (or vice versa). In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden time saving, at the time of the time saving start, the jackpot 3 signals (or jackpot 4 signals) are output for the ceiling time saving, and the jackpot 4 signals (or jackpot 3 signals) are output for the sudden time saving. may be output. In this way, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving so that the external device can recognize it.

[Transmission of external information or test signal]
FIG. 55 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted.

Figure 55 (A) is the last special figure variation display game in the previous time saving state (special figure variation display game reaching the number of times of time saving), there is a ceiling number of times and stop of the time saving pattern, and the next special figure variation display It shows a case of a time saving state after the game (time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing at which the previous time saving state ends is the timing at which the time saving end setting process (A4812, FIG. 33) is executed within the special figure fluctuation processing, that is, the previous special figure fluctuation display This is the timing when the variable display of the game stops. In addition, the timing when the later time saving state (ceiling time saving and sudden time saving) starts is the time when the time reduction variation number (A5123, A5126) is set in the processing during special figure display, that is, the previous special figure variation display game It is the timing when the display of the stop result ends (substantially equal to the timing when the next special figure fluctuation display game starts).

In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variation display game stops, the time saving end setting processing in the special figure variation processing will cause the off data of the 2 jackpot signals as a signal related to the time saving end to be placed in the external information output data area. It is set and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A4901), and as a signal related to the time saving end, a fluctuation time reduction state signal (special design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, special design 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A4902). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variable display game is stopped (after the previous time saving is completed).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving start is set in the external information output data area by the support operation setting process. (Hall computer, etc.) (A5301), and as a signal related to the time saving start, the variable time shortened state signal (special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A5303). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned on after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends.

In this way, when the special figure fluctuation display game (the previous special figure fluctuation display game) in which the time saving ends has just reached the ceiling number or stopped with the time saving pattern, it is clear that the time saving has ended once. become. In addition, by turning off the output of external information (2 jackpot signals) and test signals (variation time reduction state signal, etc.) for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stop pattern), time saving When restarting, the ON state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the conventional gaming machine, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the time saving ends by the time saving end setting process in the special figure display processing. do. In the time saving end setting process, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving end is set in the external information output data area and output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the variable time reduction state as a signal related to the time saving end Signal OFF data and the like are set in the test signal output data area and output to the test-firing test apparatus.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends. However, at this timing, the support operation setting process immediately turns on the 2 jackpot signals and the variable time reduction state signal, so it will not be substantially turned off (the on state is substantially continued become). Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, in the conventional gaming machine, it becomes unclear when the time saving has ended, and when the time saving resumes, the ON state of the output of the external information and the test signal becomes unclear.

[Safety device-related processing]
Next, the details of the safety device-related processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the procedure of safety device related processing. The safety device-related processing is in-area processing and is executed as part of the above-described in-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-region work area (A9401). If the safety device operating flag=1, it can be determined that the safety device is operating. If the safety device is in operation (result of A9401 is "Y"), the safety device related processing is terminated.

Game control device 100, when the safety device is not in operation (result of A9401 is "N"), loads the safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the outside work area (A9402), the safety device It is determined whether or not the operation information is the value of the old operation information area (A9403). If the safety device actuation information is the value of the old actuation information area (the result of A9403 is "Y"), since there is no change in the safety device actuation information, the effect command is not set (sent), and the processing of step A9409 transition to

If the safety device activation information is not the value of the old activation information area (the result of A9403 is "N"), the game control device 100 has a change in the safety device activation information, so that an effect command can be set (transmitted). A safety device operation-related command table in which safety device operation information and commands are associated is set (A9404), and a command (ACTION section) corresponding to the safety device operation information is acquired (A9405). Then, it is determined whether or not there is no command definition (A9406). In the safety device activation-related command table, the command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is not defined (because there is no command), so the safety device activation information is the safety device non-activation information (value 0) , it can be determined that there is no command definition. If there is no command definition (result of A9406 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A9409 without setting (transmitting) an effect command.

Game control device 100, when there is a command definition (the result of A9406 is "N"), prepares a safety device operation-related command (MODE section) as an effect command (A9407). When the safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3), it can be determined that there is a command definition. Then, an effect command setting process for setting (transmitting) an effect command is executed (A9408). Note that the effect command consists of a MODE section and an ACTION section. In addition, in the safety device operation-related command table, the command corresponding to the safety device non-operation information (value 0) is defined to omit the determination in step A9406, and the safety device non-operation information (value 0) is also safe. Device operation-related commands may be set (transmitted).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the safety device operation information is safety device operation information (value 3) (A9409). If the safety device activation information is not the safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "N"), the safety device related processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the safety device activation information is the safety device activation information (value 3) (result of A9409 is "Y"), "1" indicating that the safety device is activated is displayed in the safety device activation flag area. is saved as a safety device operating flag (A9410), and then the safety device related processing is terminated. If the safety device in-operation information (value 3) is saved in step A9804 (described later) in the previous timer interrupt process, the result of step A9409 will be "Y" in the next timer interrupt process.

As described above, when the safety device activation information changes to safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3), safety A device operation-related command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a form including safety device operation information in part (ACTION section). When the ACTION part is safety device activation warning information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3), the safety device activation-related command corresponds to the activation notification state respectively. The operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state, the operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state, and the operating command corresponding to the operation state.

By receiving the operation notice command, the performance control device 300 can display the operation notice display (for example, the characters "I will stop soon") on the display device 41 in the operation notice state of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally receiving a disadvantage by notifying the player in advance of the possibility of the game being stopped and urging the player to finish the game. In addition, it is possible to give a surprise to a person who is committing fraud and encourage him/her to stop the fraud.

When the performance control device 300 receives the operation warning command, the operation warning display (for example, the characters "It will stop after winning") can be displayed on the display device 41 in the operation warning state of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of the small win or the big win, and warn the player of the disadvantage such as the stopping of consecutive wins. It should be noted that consecutive chance means that the jackpot state and the specific game state continue, for example, without passing through the normal mode (or normal game state). In addition, the actuation warning state can surprise the cheater and prompt them to stop cheating.

By receiving the operating command, the effect control device 300 can display the operating display 513 (for example, "stopping" characters) on the display device 41 in the operating state (operating state) of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent new players (guests) from using the gaming machine 10, and to stop cheating if there is someone who is cheating.

In addition, when the safety device activation information is maintained at 0, 1, 2, 3 without change (0 → 0, 1 → 1, 2 → 2, 3 → 3), the safety device activation related Commands are not sent to the effect control device 300 . Even when the safety device counter value becomes less than 190000 after reaching 190000 to 194999 and the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 0 (change from 1 to 0), the safety device activation related command is issued without command definition. Not sent. It should be noted that the change of the safety device actuation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (change from 2 to 1 and 3 to 2) is removed by the later-described extra ball confirmation processing and safety device actuation monitoring processing.

When the safety device operation information changes from 0 to 1 (at the time of change from 0 to 1), an operation notice command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 among the safety device operation related commands. When the safety device operation information changes from 1 to 2 (at the time of change from 1 to 2), an operation warning command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 among the safety device operation related commands. When the safety device actuation information changes from 2 to 3 (at the time of change from 2 to 3), the operating command is transmitted to the production control device 300 among the safety device actuation related commands. When the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step A9403 becomes "Y" only once immediately after, and the operating command is transmitted through steps A9404 to A9410, and the safety device activation flag = Since it becomes 1, the safety device is in operation (the result of A9401 is "Y"), and in the subsequent timer interrupt processing, steps A9404 to A9410 are skipped and no safety device activation-related command is transmitted.

It should be noted that the direct change of the safety device activation information from 1 to 3 itself (the change itself from 1 to 3) is removed by the difference ball confirmation processing and the safety device activation monitoring processing described later, but the safety device activation The information may change instantaneously from 1→2→3 (where 2 becomes an instantaneous value and no activation warning condition occurs as described below). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the fact that the safety device counter value reaches 195000 and the operation notice state is changed to the operation state when neither the big win nor the small win is made. Then, in response to the shift from the operation notice state of the safety device to the operation state, the operating command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the safety device operation related command (A9405, A9407).

[Outside area integration processing]
Next, details of the out-of-area integration processing (A1322) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the out-of-area integration process. The out-of-area integration process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer saving area of the outside work area (A9501), and sets the stack pointer to the top of the outside stack area (outside stack area) as the value of the outside stack area. (A9502). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the inner stack area to the outer stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSH) the register information (value) to the outside stack area for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 (A9503). Here, it is preferable to save all general purpose registers. Then, performance display device control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 and the like is executed (A9504). Subsequently, difference ball confirmation processing (A9505) for updating the difference ball number (safety device counter value) and setting the safety device operation information corresponding to the difference ball number (safety device counter value) is executed. Next, safety device activation monitoring processing for monitoring the activation of the safety device is executed (A9506).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 restores the saved register (A9507), loads it from the stack pointer saving area, sets the stack pointer (A9508), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

[Performance display device control process]
Next, the details of the performance display device control process (A9504) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing. The performance display device control process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first executes a legitimacy determination for judging the legitimacy of the performance display work area, and if it is not valid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including initial value setting). Execute (A9601). The processing of step A9601 is the same as the processing of step A1204 in FIG.

In addition, since the validity determination is executed each time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is not valid, it can be initialized immediately, and an abnormal performance display (abnormal base display of values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

In addition, initialization of the performance display work area (including initial value setting) targets areas other than the stack pointer storage area so as to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that the outside stack area is not initialized in this embodiment, but may be initialized. Even when the outside stack area is initialized, the values of the registers saved in the outside stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the work area within the area (work area for game control) and the stack area within the area (stack area for game control), so the work area within the area and does not affect the stack area within the region.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes initial display timer update processing (A9602). In the initial display timer update process, a timer is set for all blinking control (initial display control) to blink all the LEDs of the indicators of each digit of the performance display device 152 for about 5 seconds at the start of the performance display (after the power is turned on). make an update.

Next, the game control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port for which the base value is to be calculated to the performance display work area (A9603). The switch rising edge information is acquired in the input process and stored in the intra-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (A1303). As described above, in the present embodiment, the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 are the target input ports for base value calculation (input ports to be monitored). The copied switch rising edge information is used in the performance display editing process (FIG. 8).

In addition, even if a game ball is detected, the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls does not change directly, and the rising edge information (bit) of the switch that is not subject to the calculation of the base value is copied in a clear state ( mask). For example, the information of the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball outlet switch 73, etc. is copied in a cleared state. As a result, the processing related to these switches (at least the clear processing of A1211) can be omitted in the performance display editing processing.

In addition, the number of normal out balls is tentatively updated by the input (game ball detection) itself with the winning port switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 39a, the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. If it is done, the out ball detection switch 74 for detecting all the game balls ejected from the game area 32 will be redundantly updated, and the base value will be calculated as an erroneous value. In addition, the number of normal prize balls is temporarily updated by input (game ball detection) at the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, which overlaps with the switch of the winning hole and allows game balls to pass. If it is done, it will be updated redundantly overlapping with the switch of the winning opening, and the base value will be calculated as an incorrect value.

Next, the game control device 100 executes performance display device display processing (A9604). In the performance display device display process, segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data related to the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 152 is set according to the type of display period and other various conditions. For example, as display periods, a real-time value display period BL, a 1st previous display period B1, a 2nd previous display period B2, and a 3rd previous display period B3 are provided. , the segment output data corresponding to the base values measured in the last aggregation interval, the second aggregation interval, and the third aggregation interval.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period, and determines whether or not it is time to switch the display period (A9605). If it is time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "Y"), the display period switching setting is executed (A9606), and the performance display device control processing ends. When it is not time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the performance display device control process without executing the display period switching setting.

In the switching setting of the display period, the switching setting of the information of the display period is performed like BL->B1->B2->B3->BL->. Also, the initial value of the timer for period switching (for example, the initial value corresponding to a predetermined period of 5 seconds) is set.

[Processing for checking difference balls]
Next, the details of the differential ball confirmation process (A9505) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the extra ball confirmation process. The difference check process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program. In the extra ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value (the extra ball number + 100,000) that suggests the extra ball number is updated, and the safety device operation information that suggests the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag of the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-region work area (A9701). When the safety device is in operation (result of A9701 is "Y"), the difference ball confirmation process is terminated immediately, and the safety device counter value and the safety device activation information are not updated. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the out-of-area integrated processing program (program related to the safety device) included in the out-of-area program has a configuration that is not executed while the game is stopped, and if the safety device is activated and the game is stopped , the process of step A9701 may be omitted because the out-of-area integration process including the extra ball confirmation process is not executed (result of A1320 is "Y"). If there is no processing in step A9701, the safety device in-operation flag area is read and written by the internal program and becomes an area that is not read by the external program (area that is not accessed).

Game control device 100, when the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9701 is "N"), the old operation information of the old operation information area included in the outside work area is 2 or more (old operation information area ≥ 2) (A9702). When the old actuation information is 2 or more (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the extra ball confirmation process is terminated, and the safety device counter value and the safety device actuation information are not updated.

The game control device 100, when the old operation information is less than 2 (the result of A9702 is "N"), out based on the switch rising edge information of the switch control area (work area within the area) regarding the fourth input port 126 It is determined whether or not there is an input to the ball detection switch 74 (A9703). If there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the safety device counter value is 0 (A9704). If the safety device counter value is not 0 (the result of A9704 is "N"), the safety device counter value, which is the value of the safety device counter field, is updated by -1 (decremented by 1) (A9705). Therefore, in response to the number of discharged balls increasing by 1 with the input to the out ball detection switch 74, the number of difference balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) and the safety device counter value (= number of difference balls + 100,000) ) will be decremented by 1 and updated. Next, the acquired game ball number is loaded from the acquired game ball number area included in the intra-area work area (A9706).

The game control device 100, when there is no input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "N"), or when the safety device counter value is 0 (the result of A9704 is "Y"), safety The device counter value is maintained without being updated by -1, and the acquired game ball number is loaded (A9706).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the safety device counter value of the safety device counter area included in the outside work area (A9707), and adds the acquired game ball number to the safety apparatus counter value (A9708). The number of acquired game balls is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption, that is, the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption. number of balls) and thus the safety device counter value (=number of difference balls + 100,000) is increased by the number of acquired game balls and updated.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the counter reference value (195000) (whether safety device counter≧195000) (A9709). If the safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the counter reference value (195000) (the result of A9709 is "Y"), the safety device counter value is set to the upper limit so that the safety device counter value returns to the upper limit value (counter reference value of 195000). A value (195000) is set (A9710), and the upper limit value is saved in the safety device counter area as the value after addition (A9711). Note that the safety device counter value may exceed the upper limit value and become 195000+α at step A9708. Here, α is less than the maximum value of the number of acquired game balls (acquired within one interruption), for example, smaller than the total value of prize balls when all the winning hole switches are simultaneously input.

On the other hand, if the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195000) (the result of A9709 is "N"), there is no need to limit it to the upper limit value, so the value after addition by the addition processing in step A9708 is left as it is. Save in safety device counter area (A9711). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the value after addition (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

In addition, by limiting the safety device counter value to the upper limit value 19500, the range of the safety device counter area (number of bytes or number of bits) is clarified, which is convenient for the development of the game control program.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the operation information number (here, 0 to 2) corresponding to the safety device counter value (A9712). Corresponding to the safety device counter value of 0 to 189999, the safety device counter value of 190000 to 194999, and the safety device counter value of 195000, the operation information number is "0" indicating the non-operating state (normal state) of the safety device. ”, “1” indicating an operation warning state, and “2” indicating an operation warning state. It should be noted that the operation information number is not set to "3", which indicates the operating state in which the safety device is in operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the current safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old operation information area (A9713). Then, it is determined whether or not the old operation information is 2 and the operation information number is 1 (old operation information=2 and operation information number=1) (A9714). If the old operation information = 2 and the operation information number = 1 (the result of A9714 is "Y"), the safety device operation information "2" (loaded value) without saving the operation information number in the safety device operation information area is maintained, and the extra ball confirmation process is terminated. This prevents the safety device activation information from changing from "2" to "1" (prevention of change from 2 to 1). Then, since the old operation information is 2 (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the extra ball confirmation processing after the next timer interrupt will be terminated immediately, and the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information will not be updated. The safety device activation information "2" is maintained.

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (the result of A9714 is "N": old operation information ≠ 2 or operation information number ≠ 1), the operation information Save the number in the safety device activation information area and update the safety device activation information area (A9715). After that, the extra ball confirmation process is terminated. Even if "2" indicating the operation warning state is saved in the safety device operation information area, if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the operation state of the safety device is immediately indicated in the subsequent safety device operation monitoring process. 3" is saved in the safety device activation information area and no activation warning condition is generated.

In this way, in the extra ball confirmation process, the safety device activation information corresponds to each of the safety device counter value of 0 to 189999, the safety device counter value of 190000 to 194999, and the safety device counter value of 195000. "0" (safety device non-operating information) indicating the non-operating state (normal state), "1" indicating the operating notice state (safety device operating notice information), "2" indicating the operating warning state (safety device operating warning information).

The change pattern (including the maintenance pattern) from the old information (old operation information of A9713) to the updated new information (A9715) of the safety device operation information is 0→0, 0→1, 1→0, 1→1, Either 1→2 or 2→2, and as described above, the change of 2→1 is prevented (A9714).

In addition, the game control device 100 produces a differential ball command indicating the updated safety device counter value (A9711) or a differential ball command indicating the updated differential ball number (=safety device counter value - 100,000). It may be transmitted to the control device 300 (sub board), and the effect control device 300 may cause the display device 41 or the like to display the safety device counter value or the difference ball number. In that case, in the differential ball confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device operation warning information) (A9702), the safety device counter value is updated, and the processing of steps A9709 and A9710 is omitted so that the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit value of 19,500. However, corresponding to the safety device counter value of 195000 or more, the safety device activation information is set to "2" (safety device activation warning information) indicating the activation warning state.

As above, the differential ball confirmation process has been described, but step A9706 of the differential ball confirmation process is the number of game media that has been paid out or the number of game media determined to be paid out, which is the number of payouts that can be counted. Configure counting means. Steps A9703-A9705 of the extra ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of used game media (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). Step A9708 of the differential ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculated value (for example, a safety device counter value or the differential ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses.

[Safety device activation monitoring process]
Next, the details of the safety device activation monitoring process (A9506) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 57) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the safety device activation monitoring process. The safety device operation monitoring process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-described out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the safety device operation information is 2 or more (safety device operation information≧2) (A9801). When the safety device activation information is 2 or more (the result of A9801 is "Y"), that is, when the safety device activation warning information (value 2) or the safety device activation information (value 3) is set, It is determined whether it is during a big hit or a small hit (A9802). Here, whether or not it is during the big hit or the small hit can be determined based on, for example, the game processing number (special game processing number, accessory game processing number). The game process number is stored in the game process number area (special game process number area, character object game process number area) of the intra-area work area.

For example, if the game processing number of the jackpot ending game processing number is the jackpot fanfare game processing number, it can be determined that the jackpot is in progress. In this embodiment, if the accessory game process number is 1 to 5, it can be determined that the jackpot is in progress. Also, for example, from the game processing number of the start of the small win (or fanfare of the small win (only if it exists)) to the game processing number of the small win remaining ball processing (or the ending of the small win (only if it exists)), the small win can be judged as medium. In this embodiment, if the special figure game process number is 3 to 5, it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. It should be noted that it may be determined that the small winning is in progress from the time when the small winning symbol is derived, or it may be determined that the big winning is in progress from the time when the big winning symbol is derived. In the case where a big win is caused by a V win during a small win, it may be determined that the big win is in progress from the time when the V win is made.

The game control device 100 loads the current safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area when there is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A9802 is "N"), and the old operation is performed. Save in the information area (A9803). Then, the safety device operation information (value 3) is saved in the safety device operation information area, and the safety device operation information area is updated (A9804).

On the other hand, if the safety device operation information is less than 2 "0" or "1" (the result of A9801 is "N"), or in the case of a big hit or a small hit (the result of A9802 is "Y" ), immediately terminate the safety device activation monitoring process and substantially do nothing in the safety device activation monitoring process.

As described above, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set, and in the activation warning state (condition (1) is satisfied and condition (2) is not satisfied) to warn the activation of the safety device, the jackpot or When the small hit is finished and neither the small hit nor the big hit is achieved (when the condition (2) is satisfied), the safety device operation information is set to the safety device operation information (value 3) (safety device operation information 2 → 3 change) (A9804). As a result, the safety device operating flag is set to "1" (safety device related processing A9410), and the operating state (stop state) in which the safety device is operated, that is, as a special figure fluctuation display game, a normal figure fluctuation display game , and a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) in which a round game or the like cannot be executed can be generated. Thus, the safety device operating flag can be set based on the safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (part of the outside work area). The safety device operating flag of "1" indicates that the safety device has been operated (is in operation) based on the establishment of the operating condition (predetermined condition) or that a game is not possible. It should be noted that the result of steps A1309, A1603, A1612, A2201, etc. becomes "Y" based on the safety device operating flag of "1", and the game stop state occurs.

Since the safety device is activated and the game cannot be played, it is possible to appropriately take countermeasures against cheating when the number of difference balls or the number of safe balls is large. It may be possible to suppress the addiction to the game of the person.

In addition, even if the safety device counter value of 195000 is reached and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (A9712, A9715 of the difference ball confirmation process), if it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (result of A9802 is "N"), the safety device activation information is instantly switched from safety device activation warning information (value 2) to safety device activation information (value 3) (A9804). That is, in this case, before the operation warning command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, the safety device operation warning information (value 2) in the safety device operation information area is overwritten with the safety device operation information (value 3). It will be erased. Therefore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 when neither a big win nor a small win, the operation warning state for warning the operation of the safety device does not occur, and the safety device is activated immediately afterward, and the game is stopped (game is not possible). state, game prohibited state) occurs. Note that this corresponds to an instantaneous change in the safety device activation information from 1 to 2 to 3 as described above (2 is an instantaneous value and the activation warning state does not occur), but it gives advance notice of the activation of the safety device. In response to the transition from the operation notice state to the operation state in which the safety device is in operation, the operating command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the safety device operation related command (A9405, A9407).

In addition, if the safety device activation warning information (value 3) is set and the safety device has already been activated and the game is stopped, the out-of-area integration process is not executed (the result of A1320 is "Y ”), the safety device operating information is maintained at the safety device operating information (value 3), and the game stop state is continued.

In this embodiment, either before or after the V winning during the small winning, if the safety device counter value reaches 195000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set, after the big winning due to the V winning ends , In step A9804, safety device operating information (value 3) is set and the game is stopped (a big hit occurs). However, as another example, if the safety device operation warning information (value 2) is set before the V winning during the small win, the safety device operating information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win is completed, and the game is stopped. state (no big win), and if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set after the V prize during the small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set after the big win due to the V prize is completed. may be put in a game stop state (a big hit occurs). In addition, as a further example, even if the safety device operation warning information (value 2) is set before or after the V prize during the small hit, the safety device operating information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win ends. It may be set to stop the game (no big hits).

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initialization (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes RTC read processing for reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. When power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004 may be executed between). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted so as to match the time of the RTC 338 . And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals (display device 41, etc.) by the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor), the player, etc. is executed (B0011). . The operations include operation of operation units such as the cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, the effect button 25, and the volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the game machine. In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production points are added by executing the production or operation to which the production points are to be added, and the production points are carried over to the next game when the game is finished or the game is stopped. At times (at the time of stopping), for example, information including information on performance points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code. For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in hall/player setting mode processing and safety device system processing (at the time of receiving a command during operation).

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes customer waiting demonstration editing processing for editing and controlling the content of the customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the processing of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Screen drawing is instructed (B0020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling effect devices (board effect device 44, frame effect device, etc.) such as movable accessories (electric accessories) driven by motors and solenoids (B0023 ). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0023. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the main process (FIG. 61) described above will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the number of received commands from the value (B1103), the content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the contents of the received command analysis. Processing is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 62) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). A command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. be. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are composed of the MODE section and the ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, if the ACTION part is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). In addition, the variation system command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special design, and there is, for example, a variation command. If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result in B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a variation command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit-related commands are commands for commanding operations (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to effects during a big win or a small win. These include a round command for commanding, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, an ending command for commanding an ending screen, and the like. If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the winning command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the pattern command (B1209). In addition, the symbol-based commands include, for example, a decoration special figure 1 command and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a single-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). . The look-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), a look-ahead symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead pattern system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (B1215 ). Prefetch variation commands include, for example, prefetch variation pattern commands. If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( If the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model specifying command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of game machine is executed (B1302), and single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303 ). If the MODE part indicates a command for RAM initialization (result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and one-shot command processing is executed. finish.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command ( B1305). For example, power failure recovery commands include a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents a customer waiting demonstration command (B1307 ). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (B1309). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (B1311). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE part indicates a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). In addition, as error/fraud commands, for example, fraud occurrence command, fraud release command, state off command, state on command, magnet fraud notification command (magnetism error command), board radio wave fraud notification command (board radio wave error command) be. As fraud occurrence commands, there are commands indicating the occurrence of fraudulent winning based on the signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43. The fraud cancellation command is a command indicating the cancellation of fraud. In the winning slot switch/state monitoring process (A1308), occurrence of fraudulent prize winning and fraud cancellation are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and a fraud cancellation command can be transmitted. State-on commands include the generation of a switch signal for shot ball failure (shot ball failure error), the generation of an overflow switch signal (overflow error), the generation of an abnormal dispensing status signal (abnormal dispensing error), and the glass frame open detection switch 63. There is a command that indicates the generation of a signal from (glass frame open error) and the generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred. When there is detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted in magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1315). When there is detection (radio fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a board radio fraud notification command is transmitted in radio fraud monitoring processing (A1316).

If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel the notification of an error or illegality (B1316), Ends single-shot command processing. In the error/injustice setting process, for example, an error or injustice notification sound is generated, LEDs for performance provided in the gaming machine 10 such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, The display device 41 or the like is set to display an error.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part represents a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the number of out-balls reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the number of out balls command (the result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE part represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of the count (the result of B1321 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents the setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command for restoration from power failure in step A1049 of FIG. 5B and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1047. Then, if the MODE part indicates a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change system command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, there is a command (A1033) during probability setting change. If the MODE part indicates a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting change indication is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command of the setting change system (the result of B1325 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). . As a setting confirmation type command, there is, for example, a probability setting confirming command (A1036). If the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), setting confirmation type information setting processing is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of the setting confirmation system (the result of B1327 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents the command of the safety device related system (B1329 ). Safety device-related commands include, for example, a safety device activation-related command (A9407). When the difference ball command including the difference ball information such as the safety device counter value and the number of difference balls is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the command of the safety device related system includes this difference ball command. good. If the MODE part indicates a safety device-related command (result of B1329 is "Y"), the safety device-related processing is executed (B1330), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the safety device system processing, the content of a safety device related command is stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

In the safety device system processing, information included in the safety device related command can be displayed on the display device 41 as processing corresponding to the command. For example, when a safety device activation-related command is received as a safety device-related command, safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning) included in the ACTION part of the safety device activation-related command The display device 41 displays the safety device-related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, activation display 513) corresponding to the information (value 2) and safety device operating information (value 3). In addition, for example, when a ball difference command is received as a safety device-related command, the number of ball difference is displayed on the display device 41 .

The display of the difference number (=safety device counter value - 100,000) corresponds to the received difference command, and the value of the entire range (for example, 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) is displayed on the display device 41. Alternatively, only values within a predetermined range (for example, 90,000 to 100,000 after the operation warning state) may be displayed. If the number of difference balls is displayed only in this predetermined range, it can be displayed only when the number of difference balls is important and can attract the player's attention, and when the number of difference balls is not important, the number of difference balls can be displayed. By hiding, the display device 41 can be easily seen. As the predetermined range, the range corresponding to the operation notice state (90,000 or more and less than 95,000), the range corresponding to the operation warning state and the operation state (95,000 or more), the operation notice state, the operation warning state, and the operation There is a range corresponding to all states (90,000 or more), a value or more immediately before or after entering the operation warning state (for example, 89,000 or more, 91,000 or more), and the like. In addition, the number of difference balls itself may be displayed, or the number of difference balls may be indirectly displayed in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (stopped). good too. Furthermore, instead of the difference number of balls, the safety device counter value may be displayed, and when the safety device counter value is within a predetermined range (for example, 190,000 or more after the operation notice state), it is displayed on the display device 41. may be made.

Note that the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) corresponding to the number of difference balls that changes in units of one. For example, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference number of balls command can be changed by one between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, like the actual number of difference balls. A balance command may be sent each time the safety device counter value and thus the balance number is updated (A9711).

Further, the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) corresponding to the number of difference balls that changes in a predetermined unit. For example, the difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command can be changed in units of 1000, such as 0 (= actual difference ball number 0 to 999), 1000 (= actual difference ball number 1000 to 1999), 2000 (= The actual number of difference balls may be 2000 to 2999), . In this case, in order to reduce the chances of sending the extra ball command, the extra ball command may be transmitted each time the safety device counter value and thus the extra ball number are updated in units of 1000 (A9711). Also, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command may have a value on the negative side.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1331). . It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). Then, if the MODE part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1331 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1332).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1332 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1333), and the game after all symbols have stopped. The state flag is set to the normal state (B1334), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1334, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1331 is "N"), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1332 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not described in FIG. 64 in single-shot command processing. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a time reduction variation number command, effect rotation speed command, hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction notification command, right hitting instruction notification command) etc. from the game control device 100, and the command may be processed. The production control device 300 can acquire the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state from the time reduction fluctuation number command (time reduction fluctuation number) or the like, and can acquire the production remaining number of rotations in each production mode from the production rotation number command or the like, and the time reduction state. Effect can be set based on the remaining number of fluctuations in , the number of rotations remaining in each effect mode, and the like. The effect control device 300 displays a hitting instruction display (left hitting instruction display or right hitting instruction display) that instructs (suggests) how to hit in response to a hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction information command or right hitting instruction information command). ) can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the prefetch pattern system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Effect control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a look-ahead variation-based command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation-based command (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 66, the details of the prefetch variation-related command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the prefetch variation command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the design of the latest suspension information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and of the look-ahead variation system command The MODE portion of the intra-sub prefetch variation command is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and an intra-sub look-ahead variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the look-ahead variation command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the MODE part and ACT part after conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the MODE part and ACT part after conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and pending number. Save to the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are types in the reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 uses it as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. . For example, normal reach also has types such as normal reach minus 1 stop failure and normal reach plus 1 stop failure. Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating reach of the same system into the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), loads the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). As the look-ahead effect (pre-read preview effect), for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, a pending change notice, and the like. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (suspension change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the generated look-ahead effect does not start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), set and save the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect during the hold shift (when the hold display moves, when the hold number decreases). (B1717). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends. In addition, the look-ahead effect is an effect that informs the expectation of a big hit (expectation for a special result) by notifying information that suggests the result (game result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops. may notify information suggesting the set probability setting value (1 to 6). That is, the effect control device 300 can perform the prefetch effect so as to change the pending display (icon) of the prefetch target based on the degree of expectation for big hits and the probability set value.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), ends the prefetch variation system command processing as it is.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, the table is used for each MODE, and the design type is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the design type is a lost design, a special figure 1 jackpot pattern A, a special figure 2 jackpot pattern BF, a jackpot pattern G in the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation), a time saving pattern ( It corresponds to support per pattern) etc.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undecided (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and in the effect during variation A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 68) described above will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of points of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) corresponding to the first half notice distribution group Set the address table (B2002), acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Effect control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a change without reach (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if it is a change with reach, the number of points of the effect point, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is set. An address is acquired (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) are set (B2007), and the ACT of the variation system command is set. The address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the change time and main reach content from the change command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, for example, the display (display of the pending shift) that the pending display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set is set (B2015). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based on setting information (setting values) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special figure in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41 The display setting of the 4th symbol variation related to (4th symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. good too.

[Processing of winning commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 63) described above will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of winning command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the win-related command is a big-win fanfare command or a small-win fanfare command, fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare effect. (B2102). In addition, corresponding to the big win fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, the display device 41 or the like may display (announce) the display of the hitting instruction (left hitting instruction or right hitting instruction). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the win system command processing is terminated. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, and the current A game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to be in a round (B2105, B2106), and the winning system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the winning system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to be in an interval (B2108, B2109), and the win system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents the ending ( B2110). If the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, The game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and the win system command processing is terminated.

It should be noted that, if the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 does not execute any processing and ends the hit system command process. do.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 71A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the first embodiment. The game state transitions (transitions) by the game control of the game control device 100 . The game states are particularly shown to be transitioned by the occurrence of a big win, or by the passage of a predetermined number of games (the number of rotations, the number of fluctuations) as a trigger. In FIG. 71A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special pattern probability), the state of the normal pattern probability (normal pattern probability) that is the probability of the winning result of the normal pattern variation display game, the production mode, the main Features such as a different variation display game (main variation display game, main variation), right-handed or left-handed shooting mode, etc. are shown.

The performance mode (performance stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the jackpot end processing (FIG. 40), the performance mode information check processing (FIG. 35), etc., as described above. However, not limited to this, the effect control device 300 can also be set based on the number of times of time saving, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit, and the like.

In addition, in FIG. 71A, specific game states B and C (time saving mode # 3, # 4) in the case of sudden time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving design due to reaching the ceiling number of times are omitted (similar to FIG. 71B), but will be described later. will be described in detail in the second embodiment (FIG. 77) and the third embodiment (FIG. 82).

In the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

It should be noted that, in the transition state, since the jackpot probability and normal pattern per probability are the same as the normal game state, the transition state may be included in the normal game state in terms of probability. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal game state in which the main variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game. However, in the transition state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed by the digestion of the remaining reservation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation display game, and the V passing (to the V winning opening) in the small hit and the small hit A big hit by the passage of a game ball, V prize) occurs with a small hit probability (1/8). Therefore, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than normal, and from this point of view, it may be regarded as a game state that can be distinguished from the normal game state. Further, the transition state and the specific game state (time saving state) may be put together as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the specific game state (time saving state) may be the first advantageous state and the transition state may be the second advantageous state. state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to a low probability (special pattern low probability), and sets the normal pattern hit probability to a low probability (normal pattern low probability). In the present embodiment, the normal low probability state is assumed to be a state without general electric support (no support state), and the normal low probability state is assumed to be a general electric support state (supported state). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened due to the general pattern in the state with support, if the probability is low when the general pattern is opened, there is no support state. becomes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration is also possible in which the support state is regarded as being present while the normal variable prize winning device 37 is open.

Also, in the normal game state, the production mode is the normal mode. In the normal game state, left-handed hitting that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 36 is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting, and is recommended as a game ball shooting mode. The main starting area where the game ball is likely to win in the recommended shooting mode is the first start winning opening 36, and the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation special figure) becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The sub-starting area where the game ball is difficult to win in the recommended shooting mode becomes the normal variable winning device 37, and the sub-variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be a low probability state, but the normal pattern hit probability to be a high probability (normal pattern high probability). In the specific game state, as the shooting mode of the game ball, the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, and the right hitting aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, in the specific game state, there are cases where the number of times of time saving is below the reference number (5 times here) (number of times of time saving ≤ 5) and 99 times larger than the number of times of time saving (number of times of time saving = 99). The performance mode in the case of the number of times of time saving ≤ 5 is set to the time saving mode #1, the performance mode in the case of the number of times of working time = 99 is set to the time saving mode #2, and the performance modes of the time saving mode #1 and the time saving mode #2 are made different to play the game. may improve the interest of In addition, the reference number of times may be, for example, a reciprocal value (8 times) of the probability of a small hit of 1/8, and may be 7 times or the like. As the reference number of times is smaller, it becomes more difficult to generate a small win in the time saving mode #1 (which becomes a big win state by passing the V in the small win), while the difference from the performance mode #2 is large and sharp.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of the specific game state (time saving state). In the transition state, the remaining hold caused by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) opened by the normal game win in the specific game state is digested, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. be. The production mode of the transition state is the remaining pending consumption mode. In addition, the remaining hold digestion mode is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity due to the normal game during the specific game state, and a mode after the opening of the general electricity after the opening of the general electricity is finished. You can divide. In the pre-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the right to target the general electricity, and in the post-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the left because the general electricity is closed.

If the remaining hold digestion mode, which is the production mode of the transition state, is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity and a mode after the end of the opening of the general electricity, the player can determine whether the general electricity is open (should he hit the right side) or is closed. It becomes easy to understand whether it is (should hit left). If not divided, it becomes easier to recognize that the remaining hold is being consumed through the transition state.

Also, as described above, the transition state and the specific game state (shortening of working hours) may be combined into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the same production mode may be used without dividing the production mode. In this case, the advantageous state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation display game can be used as a common effect mode. As will be described later, when a special figure hit occurs due to the digestion of the remaining hold (a big hit by passing V in a small hit), the player is more likely to win than when a special figure hit occurs during the specific game state. If the game value to be given is increased, a large game value can be obtained in spite of the fact that it is unclear from a common presentation mode whether the game is in a time-saving state or in the process of consuming the remaining hold, thereby making the player happy. . It should be noted that here, the game value (privilege) is, for example, the number of time reductions after the end of the big win, the number of finally obtained big wins, and the like.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described. First, in the normal game state, when a big hit (not due to V winning) occurs in a special figure variation display game, the game transitions to a specific game state after the big win state ends.

In the specific game state, when a small win (a big win state is achieved by passing V) by a special figure variation display game, the game returns to the specific game state again after the big win state ends. In this case, it returns to time saving mode #1, and the number of times of saving time as game value (privilege) is below the reference number of times (number of times of saving time ≤ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, transition from the specific game state to the transition state. For example, this predetermined transition condition is (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of time reductions (first predetermined number, initial value of time reduction variation number 2), and ( ii) The second predetermined number of times (time reduction Either the initial value of the number of fluctuations 1 (for example, twice the number of times of shortening of working hours) is exceeded, or (iii) the opening of a predetermined number of times of opening (for example, two times) is completed. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the time saving number of times (first predetermined number of times). The condition (iii) is provided as a countermeasure against stopping shots.

In the specific game state, the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 is that the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, can be executed a number of times in a short time. If only the number of times exceeding the time-saving number of times is the transition condition from the specific game state, the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, deviates from the original specification of the gaming machine 10. - 特許庁However, by providing the two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution of the sub-variation display game can be treated as a bonus (privilege), and the player can play the game according to the original specifications without causing any loss. If the player plays the game normally, it is unlikely that the condition (i) is established and the transition state is entered while the condition (ii) is established.

In addition, in the time-saving mode # 2 of the specific game state, it can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display game of 99 times of time-saving is executed, so a small hit (becomes a big hit state by passing V) is almost certainly generated. Then, after the jackpot state ends, the specific game state (time saving mode #1) is entered again. Therefore, the time-saving mode #2 becomes the next continuation determination mode (determined mode) in which the specific game state reliably continues after the end of the jackpot state.

In the transition state, when the special figure 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state as the special figure 1 variation display game. On the other hand, when a small hit occurs in the transition state (becomes a big hit state by passing V during the small win), the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state is performed after the end of the big win state, and 99 times of time saving times are given. be. That is, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) in which the remaining hold is digested, the number of time reductions (≤ Compared to 5), the number of times of time saving increases, and the game value given to the player increases. Furthermore, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), a small hit (big hit after passing V) will almost certainly occur in the next time-saving mode #2, so a total of 2 times A jackpot is secured as a game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 71B is another example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game state transition of FIG. 71B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In FIG. 71B, the remaining hold which is all the special figure 2 holds digested after the end of the time saving is divided into predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold) and excessive hold (second remaining hold), and production corresponding to the transition state The residual hold digestion mode as a mode is divided into a time-saving residual hold digest mode in which a predetermined residual hold is digested and an excess hold digest mode in which excess hold is digested. Here, the predetermined remaining hold is the first predetermined number of the special figure 2 hold that occurs during the time saving and is digested after the time saving ends (all or part of the special figure 2 hold), and the excess hold Is a special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) that is digested after a predetermined remaining hold. Excessive pending consumption mode may include, for example, a mode of displaying a result screen showing a game result on the display device 41 and other special modes. In addition, since the time saving mode and the time saving mode (time saving mode # 1 or time saving mode # 2) are common in terms of digesting the special figure 2 hold that occurred during the time saving, the production mode as the same production mode It can be made common.

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 72 is a table showing the number of times of time saving corresponding to the symbol which is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game and the prescribed remaining pending number (prescribed remaining pending number). The pattern is a pattern in the case of a big hit, and here, it is determined by a big hit pattern random number, and time-saving patterns are excluded. The symbol is a winning stop symbol and may correspond to either a stop symbol number or a stop symbol pattern. (A) relates to the winning pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game. (B) The upper figure relates to the winning pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal figure high probability state (during the time saving state), and the lower figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display in the general figure low probability state It relates to the winning pattern of the game (the winning pattern in the remaining reservation).

The symbol A is a stop symbol determined by a big hit symbol random number, and is a big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game. The pattern BF is also a stop pattern determined by the big hit pattern random number, but in the normal pattern high probability state (during the time saving state), the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit V passing (V winning) is a stop pattern. The symbol G is also a stop symbol determined by the random number of the big hit symbol, but it is related to the V passage (V prize) in the small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the low probability state of the normal pattern (small hit in the remaining hold) It is a jackpot stop symbol. If there is a small winning symbol random number in addition to the big winning symbol random number, the symbols BF and G may be the small winning stop symbols determined by the small winning symbol random number.

The pattern A has a distribution (selection rate) of 100%, and only the pattern A exists as a jackpot stop pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbols BF are distributed to the jackpot symbol random numbers at 40%, 25%, 15%, 10% and 10%, respectively. The symbol G has a distribution of 100%.

In the pattern A, which is the type of jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of times of time saving after the jackpot is one. Further, in the symbol A, the prescribed (scheduled) number of remaining reservations to be digested after the end of the time saving state is four. Therefore, the total number of reserved special figures 2 that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 5 (=1+4) by regulation. In symbol A, the continuation rate is {1-(1-1/8) ⁵ }×100%=48.7% for a small hit probability of 1/8, and the confirmed mode transition rate is (1 −1/8)×{1−(1−1/8) ⁴ }×100%=36.2%.

In the pattern BF, which is the type of jackpot of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game started during the normal high probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, and 1 time. be. Also, in the symbols BF, the specified remaining pending numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 reserved that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 10 by regulation in any of the symbols BF. In the patterns BF, the continuation rate is the same for each of the small hit probability of 1/8, {1-(1-1/8) ¹⁰ } × 100% = 73.7%. The mode transition rates are 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3% and 61.2%, respectively.

In the pattern G, which is the type of jackpot (remaining pending jackpot) of the special figure 2 variable display game started during the normal low probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 99 times. In addition, in the pattern G, the prescribed number of remaining reservations is four. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 pending that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state is 103. In the pattern G, the continuation rate is approximately 100% and the decision mode transition rate is approximately 0% with respect to the small hit probability of 1/8. Therefore, in the symbol G, after the jackpot ends in the remaining hold, the game shifts to the time saving mode #2, and the big win is surely made again, and then the specific game state (time saving state) continues. On the other hand, in the pattern G, the fixed mode transition rate is approximately 0%, and most of the flows transition from the time-saving mode #2 in the specific game state to the time-saving mode #1 after a big hit.

In addition, the continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (within 5 times for pattern A, within 10 times for pattern BF, and within 103 times for pattern G) after the end of the jackpot state. There is a probability of re-entering the specific game state without going through the normal game state (normal mode). The confirmation mode transition rate is a probability of shifting from the remaining reservation digestion mode to the time saving mode #2 (confirmation mode, next continuation confirmation mode) by the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining reservation after the end of the jackpot state.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of special figures 2 suspended after the end of the big hit state (that is, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state), and the total number is 10. The continuation rate in the case of is greater than the continuation rate in the case of the symbol A with the total number of five. Further, in the order of symbols BF, as the number of times of time saving decreases and the number of specified remaining reservations increases, the fixed mode transition rate increases.

As described above, in the symbols BF, the number of time reductions is set according to the symbol that is the type of the big hit (type of special result), so the specific game state after the end of the big hit is set by lottery (distribution) It has a variable time-saving number of times (1 to 5) that changes randomly to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the number of remaining pending (5 to 9), which is the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the specific game state, is changed according to the number of times of time saving. Therefore, the number of remaining pending positions is also random and variable, which is set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. In particular, when a difference in game value is provided between the jackpot in the specific game state and the jackpot in the remaining hold, the player is happy and sad with the remaining hold number set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. .

In addition, regarding the winning pattern BF of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, even if the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations are variable, the total of the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations is constant. Since it is set to (10), it is possible to make the fixed mode transition rate variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. As described above, while the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the total number of time saving times and remaining pending numbers is executed, that is, the same effect in the specific game state (time saving mode) and transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) When the mode is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the time is being shortened or the remaining hold is being consumed. improves.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern fluctuation display game and the general electric movement.

As shown in FIG. 73(A), there is only one type of winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and the same general pattern is always open, and the winning state of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. , the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability per normal pattern is 0/251 (0%) in a low probability state and 251/251 (100%) in a high probability state. The normal pattern variation display game always wins in a high probability state and always misses in a low probability state, so randomness is eliminated. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the normal pattern per probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) in a low probability state (normal game state, etc.).

The start memory number (ordinary pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is substantially 0, and the normal pattern start gate 34 is played during the winning state (normal electric operation) and during fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Even if the ball passes, the normal pattern start memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not memorized. The normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started only during the stop display of the stop pattern, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 during the stop display, the normal pattern start memory is generated, but it is immediately digested and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. starts. In this way, since the starting memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not substantially accumulated, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the regular figure variation display game or the regular electric action and the special figure variation display game are easily interlocked without any deviation, and it also leads to the prevention of capture.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. In addition, it may be 200 msec in the normal pattern high probability state, and may be longer than 200 msec in the normal pattern low probability state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In the specific game state (time saving state, normal high probability state), in order to link the normal pattern fluctuation display game (and general electric operation) and the special pattern fluctuation display game without any gap, the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern stop It is preferable that the time be as short as possible. Assuming that the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, since the game ball can pass through the normal pattern start gate 34 every 600 msec, the time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game, that is, the normal The sum of the figure fluctuation time and the normal figure stop time is preferably less than 600 msec.

Also, the maximum count number (upper limit of count number) for general electricity is 10.

FIG. 73(B) is a diagram showing the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric), and the surrounding configuration. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration for almost all game balls hit to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric (universal electric open) pass through the general electric start gate 34 and win the general electric.

First, in order to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 (percentage of one game ball winning) constant when hitting to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric power, the normal Obstacle nails 32a and structures are removed as much as possible from the game area 32 around the figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加For example, in the game area 32, the obstacle nail 32a and the structure are not arranged between the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 or on the left and right. Obstacle nails 32a arranged almost directly above the normal figure starting gate 34 form a path for game balls in two rows, and prevent game balls from leaking out from there. The passage formed by the two rows of obstructing nails 32a smoothly connects to the upper passage 32c formed by the structure.

In addition, the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are arranged in a positional relationship such that the game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as it is. That is, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is arranged directly under the normal pattern starting gate 34 . For example, in the case that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened before the game ball that has passed through the normal starting gate 34 reaches the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device The distance L (distance between centers in the vertical direction) between 37 may be larger than the product of the average falling speed of the game ball and the time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game. However, the distance L is set to a short distance so that even if the falling direction of the game ball passing through the normal pattern start gate 34 deviates from the vertical direction, it will enter the normal variable winning device 37 as it is.

Furthermore, as described above, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is preferably of a so-called tongue type that can rotate so that the movable member 37b falls forward so that the number of prizes awarded to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is unlikely to be uneven. .

FIG. 73(C) shows an opening pattern (universal electric opening pattern) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (universal electric) of the present embodiment. A general electric open pattern shows the operation|movement aspect of the general electric by one general pattern hit. After the end of the jackpot state, the general electric release pattern is the same regardless of the jackpot symbols AG (that is, the jackpot type). It should be noted that the numbers enclosed in the square frames are the values of the control pointers (FIG. 51, etc.) during the normal per figure.

In this embodiment, the general electric is opened twice in the general electric open pattern by one general pattern. In addition, the general electricity may be opened two or more times. The power supply opening is divided into the first half opening and the second half opening across a long interval in which the power supply is closed. A general electric interval time (wait time), which is an interval time, is 60000 msec, and the general electric open time of the first half opening and the second half opening is both 3000 msec.

For example, if the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, the game ball reaches the normal electric every 600 msec, so it is possible to win the normal electric 5 times during the first half opening of 3000 msec, and 60000 msec. After the interval of 3000msec, it is possible to win 5 times during the opening of the second half. The special figure 2 hold accumulated during the first half opening can be digested during the interval of 60000 msec, which is the closed state of the electricity, and the number of special figure 2 reservations can be set to 0, and the maximum during the subsequent second half opening Limited (here 4) special figure 2 reservations are accumulated.

During the interval of the general electricity (during the closed state), when the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time reduction number, the specific game state (time reduction state, normal state high probability state, support state) It ends and becomes a normal pattern low probability state (transition state). Then, the special figure 2 hold that was saved during the first half opening but is digested after the time saving state ends will be the remaining reservation, and in addition, the special figure 2 reservation that will be accumulated by winning the general electricity during the second half opening of 3000 msec will also be the remaining reservation. becomes. In this way, even if it becomes a normal low probability state, it is possible to accumulate a lot of remaining reservations by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving the normal pattern per hit (specific result) of the normal pattern variation display game, it is possible to convert the normal variation prize winning device 37 to the open state multiple times, and the normal pattern variation display game In both the high-probability state in which the probability of winning a normal pattern is high and the low-probability state in which the probability is low, the normal variable winning device 37 can be converted to the open state. Therefore, even if the probability of winning a normal pattern is low, the normal variation winning device 37 can be converted to the open state and the special pattern 2 reservation can be accumulated, so that the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved. do.

Furthermore, in the first half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation and digest it at the interval, and in the latter half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation again and digest it after the general electricity operation ends. For this reason, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and to make the number of remaining reservations variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

〔Timing chart〕
Figure 74-Figure 76, after the big hit, game state, normal pattern probability (per normal pattern probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 pending number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is a timing chart showing It should be noted that time elapses toward the right side of the timing chart. FIG. 74 relates to after the big win of symbol A, FIG. 75 relates to after the big win of symbol B, and FIG. 76 relates to after the big win of symbol F.

Regarding the state after the big hit of the pattern BF, the timing of changing from the normal pattern high probability state (specific game state) to the normal pattern low probability state is different due to the difference between the number of times of saving time and the number of specified remaining reservations. , pattern B and pattern F are illustrated. The states other than the game state and the normal pattern probability are common for all of the patterns BF.

In addition, Figure 74-Figure 76 shows the passage of the game ball of the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric) (starting detection of the port 2 switch 37a) is also indicated by pulses. In FIGS. 74-76, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, and the pattern and change of the general pattern winning (winning the general pattern) are the same, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate. .

In FIGS. 74-76, during a jackpot round (during jackpot) and a jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending in which the ending effect is executed, the player hits to the right as prompted by a right-handed instruction display, etc., and the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (the first in FIG. 74). ), the general pattern (normal pattern) fluctuates on the general pattern display device 53, and the general pattern fluctuation display game is executed, and then stopped. Here, since it is in a low probability state at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, it will stop off.

Here, the jackpot ending ends when the normal pattern comes off and stops, and it becomes a high probability state of the normal pattern probability, corresponding to the specific game state (time saving mode # 1) in FIG. become. At the beginning of the right-handed state with support (normal pattern high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, and the normal pattern fluctuation starts. And since it is a high probability state with a normal pattern probability of 100%, it becomes a normal pattern hit and the general electric operation starts, and the general electric is opened as the first half open. In the open state in which the normal electric is opened, the game ball that has passed through the normal electric start gate 34 wins the normal electric as it is (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special figure 2 reservation occurs, the special figure 2 reservation is digested, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 0.

As described above, the game control device 100 sets the variation time (execution time) and stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game to the number of special figure 2 variations from the end of the jackpot state (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game). ) is controlled based on (fluctuation start information setting process of FIG. 32 and special figure fluctuation process of FIG. 33). In addition, the game control device 100 varies the variation time and the stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in three types after the big hit of the symbol A, after the big hit of the symbol BF, and after the big hit of the symbol G. set as

After the big hit of symbol A in FIG. 74, the fluctuation time is set sufficiently long so that the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game continues at least until the end of the general electric operation, that is, the end of the second half opening. The fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is approximately the same as the normal electric operation time (66000 msec, 66 seconds) in FIG. It's okay. In this way, in response to the general electric operation including the two open states (together), the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game 4 are stored with 2 holds being the upper limit.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol A is 1, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold that has accumulated 4 as the remaining hold is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2nd to 5th Special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

After the big hit of symbol B in FIG. 75, the first special figure 2 variation display game is started at least before the end of the first half opening of the general electricity and continues until after the end. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is substantially the same as the general electric open time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 75, but may be longer than the general electric open time. In response to the opening of the first half of the general electricity (together), the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value 4 be saved. The special figure 2 hold that has been saved is all digested during the interval when the general electricity is closed, and during the interval, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2 ~ 5th special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol B is 5 times, when the 5th special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a normal low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the general electricity is opened as the latter half opening. As soon as one special 2 hold is generated as a remaining hold due to the winning of the open electric power, the special 2 hold is digested, the 6th special 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special 2 holds is becomes 0.

Corresponding to the opening of the latter half of the general electricity (together), the 6th special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value of 4 be saved. The sixth special figure 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the second half of the general electric power and continues until after the end. The variable time of the sixth special figure 2 variable display game is substantially the same as the general electric open time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 75, but may be longer than the general electric open time.

After the 6th special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the 4 special figure 2 reservations saved as the remaining reservation is executed 4 times with a considerably shorter variation time than the 1st and 6th times ( 7th to 10th special figure 2 variable display game). In this way, it is possible to realize five specified remaining pending numbers corresponding to the 6th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games.

The 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed short variation time, and the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games (especially the variation time during the time saving state) A fixed variable time equal to or shorter than . As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at a good tempo and the same rhythm, and the remaining hold can be consumed quickly. In addition, since the 7th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games have nothing to do with saving just by digesting the special figure 2 reservation, the variable fluctuation time is selected by sorting the fluctuation pattern (lottery). Then, the game is no longer monotonous. In addition, the variation time of the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display game (especially the variation time during the time saving state), and it responds slowly You can also perform a production to do.

In addition, when the second half of the normal electric is completed, the normal pattern hit state ends, and the normal pattern variation display game can be executed by passing the game ball of the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate), but the normal pattern hit probability Since the normal pattern low probability state is 0%, there is no result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In addition, the stop after the end of the normal pattern per state corresponds to the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal pattern ending time.

After the big hit of the pattern F in FIG. 76, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, the general pattern prize, the number of special patterns 2 pending, the special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern fluctuation) The appearance and changes are the same as after the big hit of symbol B in FIG. However, the timing of changing from the specific game state (normal pattern high probability state) to the transition state (normal pattern low probability state, remaining reservation digestion mode) is different due to the fact that the number of times of time reduction and the specified remaining number of reservations are different between the pattern B and the pattern F. .

After the big hit of the pattern F, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is completed, the specific game state (time saving mode) ends and the general pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) is entered. . After that, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed 9 times in the same way as after the big hit of the symbol B, and 9 prescribed remaining pending numbers can be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time corresponding to the open state of the general electricity, and the special figure 2 corresponding to the closed state (interval) of the general electricity. A two-variation display game can be executed in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation by opening the first half of the general electricity and digest it at the interval, and save the special figure 2 reservation again by opening the second half of the general electricity and digest it after the end of the general electricity operation. For this reason, the number of remaining reservations can be made larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and the number of remaining reservations can be made variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

Although not shown after the big hit of the symbol G, for example, while repeating the general electric operation, the special figure 2 variable display game is a short fixed such as the 2nd to 5th and 7th to 10th times in FIGS. Only the number of times of shortening of working hours (99 times) and the remaining reserved minutes (4 times) may be executed in variable time. In addition, if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the big hit of the symbol G is fixed, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if the fluctuation time is not fixed but variable, the game will not be monotonous. .

As described above, the specific game state may be not only the time saving state but also the variable probability state (excluding the variable latent probability state). In addition, even if the first embodiment is applied not only to one type and two types of mixed machines (1 + 2 types), but also to one type of gaming machine (so-called digipachi) having a specific game state (time saving state or variable probability state) good. In one type of gaming machine with a variable state, especially for models with a high probability of hitting even with a low probability of special patterns after the end of the variable state (so-called sweet digital, a little patch), a big hit can be expected in the number of remaining reservations. Applying the embodiment is highly effective.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, a time saving state or a probability variable state). Game control means (for example, game control device 100) can execute a game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) based on start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) generated by winning a variable winning device. The game value given to the player when the game results in a special result (for example, a small win or a big win, including a big win due to a V prize during a small win) in a specific game state It differs from the game value given to the player when the game results in a special result after the state ends.

In such a gaming machine 10, since there is a difference in the game value given as a special result of the game between during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends, a game value given during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends The player will be happy and sad about the number of starting memories in which the game is executed, and the interest in the game will be improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (normal pattern variation display game). The gaming machine 10 is a variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted to an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is a specific result (normal pattern hit). Prepare. The game control means can convert the variable prize winning device to the open state a plurality of times by deriving one specific result (per normal pattern), and the probability that the game will result in a specific result (per normal pattern) is high. The variable winning device can be converted to the open state in both the high probability state and the low probability state.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability that the game will result in a specific result (normal hit) is low, the variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, general electric) can be converted to the open state, and the variable winning Since the start memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) generated by the winning of the device can be accumulated, the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and effect control means (for example, the effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game. Prepare. The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, a time saving state or a probability variable state). The game control means can generate a predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state (for example, a right-handed state with a low probability of normal pattern) even after the end of the specific game state, and the effect control means can generate a predetermined state The performance mode in is made different from the performance mode in other than the predetermined state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the end of the specific game state, the predetermined state in which the variable prize winning device is changed to the open state can be visually distinguished from the specific game state in terms of presentation. In addition, by setting the effect mode peculiar to the predetermined state, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special figure variable display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device. Therefore, in the open state of the variable winning device, the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) that is the execution right of the game (special figure variable display game) is not consumed, and the starting memory is accumulated by winning the variable winning device. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variable display game) for a long time corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device, and executes the game for a short time corresponding to the closed state of the variable winning device. can be run with Therefore, during the specific game state, the variable winning device is opened (for example, the first half open) to store a lot of starting memory (for example, special figure 2 hold), and after that, the closed state (for example, the interval) is starting memory (for example, special figure 2 to be reserved). , and after the end of the specific game state, you can save a lot of starting memory (eg, special figure 2 hold) in the open state again (eg, open in the second half). Therefore, the number of starting memories (remaining pending number) consumed after the end of the specific game state can be made larger than the upper limit value (for example, 4) of the number of starting memories. Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variation display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device for a time longer than the open state time of the variable winning device. Therefore, even if there is a gap between the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game), the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations exceeds the specified remaining number of reservations. Matches perfectly.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special figure variation display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more during the period when the variable prize winning device is in the closed state. Therefore, even if there is a gap between the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game), the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations exceeds the specified remaining number of reservations. Matches perfectly.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the specific game state to end when the game (special figure variation display game) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of time reduction or probability variation). After the end of the specific game state, the number of times the game is executed based on the starting memory generated by winning the variable winning device (prescribed remaining pending number 5 to 9) is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, time saving number of times or probability variable number of times ). Therefore, if the predetermined number of times is selected by lottery, the remaining number of reservations is also random and variable set by lottery, and the remaining number of reservations makes the player happy and sad, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means provides a predetermined number of times (for example, time saving number of times or probability variable number of times) as the game value given to the player when the game (special figure variation display game) results in a special result (small hit or big hit) can be set, and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type (symbol) of the special result. Therefore, the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game state based on the special result is set by lottery (distribution) and becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5) and changes at random, improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means, the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed after the end of the specific game state (specified remaining pending number), a predetermined number of times is constant (eg 10). Therefore, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. During the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state, if the same production mode is executed while the fixed number of special figure 2 variable display games are executed, the player is in the specific game state or after the end of the specific game state. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is or not, and it is surprising that a large game value can be obtained with a big hit of the remaining reservation after the end of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the starting memory generated by the winning of a game ball into a predetermined winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36), and the winning of a game ball into the variable winning device A second game can be executed based on the generated starting memory. The second game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be executed with priority over the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game), and when the first game is executed in the specific game state is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is executed in the specific game state decreases, and even if the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is executed in the specific game state, The start of the second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is not greatly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (general figure variation display game) and a second game (special figure variation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), and by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) A second game (special figure variation display game) can be executed based on the generated starting memory. In the specific game state, during the execution of the first game and during the winning state caused by the specific result of the first game, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), the first It does not generate the starting memory (general map memory), which is the right to execute the game.

Therefore, the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) can be started only during the stop display, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (normal pattern start gate 34) during the stop display. do. Since the start memory (normal pattern memory) of the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is not substantially accumulated in this way, the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is executed at a good tempo. For this reason, in the specific game state, the operation of the variable winning device according to the hit of the first game (normal figure variation display game) and the second game (special figure variation display game) can be easily interlocked without deviation.

In the first embodiment, the game control means terminates the specific game state when the open state of the variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) ends a specified number of times (for example, twice) in the specific game state. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific game state is extended by making the number of winnings to the variable winning device less than a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of shortening the time or the number of times of probability variation) due to the stop shot. Further, it is possible to prevent the number of open states of the variable prize winning device from being excessively increased due to the winning of the first game (normal pattern variable display game) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the execution time (variation time) of the game based on the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed from the end of the special game state. Therefore, the game (special figure fluctuation display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device, and when the variable prize winning device is open, the starting memory (for example, Special figure 2 hold) can be accumulated.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) that controls the progress of a game (variation display game). The game control means controls the number of game media (game balls) paid out in a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) or the number of game media determined to be paid out in a predetermined period. For example, a first counting means (for example, difference ball confirmation processing) capable of counting the total number of winning balls and the number of safe balls in a predetermined period is provided. The game control means comprises second counting means (for example, difference ball confirmation processing) capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). The game control means is provided with a game stopping means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a non-playable state in which the game cannot be executed based on the difference between the number of payouts and the number of used balls (for example, the number of difference balls). The game control means, when the number of times the game is executed under a predetermined condition (for example, a state with a special low probability) is a predetermined number of times (for example, the ceiling number), a specific game state (for example, a specific game state B, b time saving) can be generated. When the power is turned on, the game control means initializes information (e.g. safety device counter value) regarding the difference between the number of payouts and the number used (e.g., the number of difference balls), and initializes information (e.g., ceiling counter value) regarding the number of game executions. do not change

In such a gaming machine 10, the remaining number of games (up to a predetermined number of times) until the occurrence of the specific game state does not change when the power is turned on. The margin (tolerance, limit) can be increased (maximized) by power-on initialization. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged by turning on the power.

In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing a game includes a first area (intra-area work area) that can be a work area for game control, and a second area (outside work area) different from the first area. ) and an unused area between the first area and the second area. The gaming machine 10 includes game stopping means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game-stopped state, game-prohibited state) in which a game cannot be played when a predetermined condition (operating condition) is established. The first area can store a flag (for example, a safety device operating flag) indicating the occurrence of a non-playable state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The flag can be set based on information in a predetermined area (for example, safety device activation information area) within the second area, and is not initialized when power is turned on. The game stop means generates a game disabled state based on this flag.

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to take anti-fraud countermeasures by disabling the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. In addition, since the flag for generating the unplayable state (for example, the safety device operating flag) is not initialized when the power is turned on, the unplayable state will occur except in special situations (for example, when there is a RAM clear with a setting change). is not released. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately take countermeasures against fraud, and appropriately suppress the player's addiction to the game.

Further, in such a gaming machine 10, the storage means (for example, the RAM 111c) includes a first area (inside area work area) and a second area (outside area work area) divided by unused areas. A flag (for example, a safety device operating flag) is stored in the first area (inside area work area), and the information of a predetermined area (for example, safety device operation information area) in the second area (outside area work area) can be set based on Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish the initialization of the flag from the initialization of the information for setting the flag (the information of the predetermined area). Furthermore, it becomes easy to separate the program for setting the flag (outside program) and the game control program (inside program), and the development efficiency of the program can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the game machine 10 provided with the effect control means (the effect control device 300) capable of controlling the effect related to the game is a game medium paid out during a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) A first counting means (for example, Difference ball confirmation processing of the game control device 100). The game machine 10 includes a second counting means (for example, a difference ball confirmation process or an out ball confirmation process of the game control device 100) capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). A ball detection switch 74) is provided. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a game stopping means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a game-disabled state (game-stopped state, game-prohibited state) in which a game cannot be executed based on the number of payouts and the number of uses. Effect control means (effect control device 300), the value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses (for example, the number of difference balls and the safety device counter value) is within a predetermined range (for example, the operation notice state, the operation warning state, and the operation state ), the value can be displayed on display means (for example, the display device 41).

Therefore, the value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is displayed only within a predetermined range, and is displayed only when this value is important to attract the player's attention, and this value is not important. In some cases, the value can be hidden so that the display means can be easily seen. In addition, based on the number of payouts (safe balls, etc.) and the number of used balls, it is possible to generate a non-playable state in which the game cannot be played. or safety device counter value) is large, it is possible to effectively take countermeasures against fraud, and to effectively suppress the player's addiction to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The second embodiment relates to a special figure variation display game after the end of a specific game state with general electric support.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 77 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is the same as FIG. 71A, but a specific game state (omitted in FIGS. 71A and 71B) in the case of sudden time reduction due to ceiling time reduction and time reduction pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times is added. It differs from FIG. 71A in that the

The specific game state includes a specific game state A, which is a time saving state that occurs as a time saving (a time saving) immediately after a big hit due to a big hit, and a time saving state that occurs as a ceiling time saving (b time saving) without being caused by a big hit. A specific game state B and a specific game state C, which is a time saving state that suddenly occurs as a time saving (c time saving) without being caused by a big hit, are included. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state is a time saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state (with general electric support / special figure high probability) in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

In the specific game states AC, the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, but there is general electric support. In the specific game state AC, since the normal variable winning device 37 (universal electric) is likely to be released, it is recommended to hit the right hand aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 as the shooting mode of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 1 variable display game.

As the production mode of the specific game state A, there are time saving modes #1 and #2 as in FIG. 71A. In the present embodiment, the number of times of time saving related to time saving mode #1 is a fixed value (here, three times) for simplicity, but may be a variable value as in the first embodiment (FIG. 72). The production mode of the specific game state B is the time saving mode #3, and the production mode of the specific game state C is the time saving mode #4. It can be distinguished from the time saving state by (c time saving) by production. Incidentally, it is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the performance mode the same in the specific game state B and the specific game state C so as to share the performance.

In addition, time-saving modes # 3 and # 4 are different production modes from time-saving modes # 1 and # 2, and the production modes are different. Specific game states B and C) can be distinguished by the effect. Incidentally, the same production mode can be used for the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C to reduce the development cost by making the production common.

Also, in the specific game state A, if it is possible to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving mode # without changing time saving mode # 1, # 2 to time saving mode # 3, # 4 1 and #2 may be continued, and in this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that the specific game state A has been extended (the impression that the number of time reductions has increased). Of course, in the specific game state A, when it is possible to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving mode # 1, # 2 is changed to time saving mode # 3, # 4, ceiling time saving or sudden time saving The player may be notified that has occurred.

The contents of the normal game state and transition state (normal game state in which the remaining hold is consumed) are the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 71A). The production mode of the transition state is described as one remaining holding digestion mode without dividing the mode before the end of the general electric opening and the mode after the end of the general electric opening, but it may be divided.

Next, transitions (transitions) from each game state, especially transitions to specific game states B and C and transitions from specific game states B and C will be described.

In the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability variable state) reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction ) and transition to the specific game state B (time saving mode #3). In addition, in the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit result (time saving result, time saving pattern), suddenly time saving (c time saving) and specific game state C (time saving mode #4).

In addition, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving state may be continuously (overlapping) caused by the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, or continuously It does not have to be generated. Basically, regardless of the number of remaining time reductions in the specific game state A, when the conditions for transitioning to the specific game states B and C (reaching the ceiling number of times and generating support hit results) are established, transition to the specific game states B and C However, it may be changed whether or not to transition according to the number of remaining time saving. For example, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B (b number of times of saving time m3) is greater than the number of times of saving time remaining in the specific game state A (number of times of time saving not yet consumed), from the specific game state A to the specific game state B transition to When the number of times of time saving in specific game state C (c number of times of time saving m4) is larger than the number of times of time saving remaining in specific game state A, transition from specific game state A to specific game state C is performed. If the number of time reductions (m3, m4) in the specific game states B and C is equal to or less than the number of time reductions remaining in the specific game state A, even if the time reduction pattern is displayed, the specific game states B and C do not occur and are specified. The game state A does not transition to the specific game states B and C. In addition, the time saving pattern does not have to be displayed in the case of the ceiling time saving.

Basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C ends, it shifts to the remaining reservation digestion mode, but if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains, it is made to return to the specific game state A. good too. That is, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains even after the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B and C ends, the specific game state A continues from the specific game state B, C to the specific game state A It may return and not transition to the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode).

Also, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, regardless of the relationship between the number of time reductions in the specific game states B and C and the remaining number of time reductions in the specific game state A, It is also possible to have a configuration that does not generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving. Even in this configuration, the specific game state A does not transition to the specific game states B and C even if the time saving pattern is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to generate (not overlap) a time saving state due to sudden time saving (c time saving) due to a support hit result (time saving pattern) during the specific game state A. That is, even in the specific game state A, there is a case where the support hit result is won against the special figure 2 variable display game, but even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is possible not to suddenly generate a time saving state due to time saving (c time saving). preferred. In this case, the display device 41 or the lamp display device 80 may display a lost pattern as a decorative special pattern for presentation. Also, in the same way as described in FIG. 23 of the first embodiment, in this embodiment, without providing a support hit result for the special figure 1 variable display game, even in normal mode (normal game state), suddenly time saving (c It is preferable not to generate a time saving state due to time saving. Therefore, in the present embodiment, preferably, transition to the specific game state C (time saving mode #4) only from the transition state for digesting the remaining hold (remaining hold digestion mode). In this way, the value of the remaining pending consumption mode increases, and the player comes to expect the remaining pending consumption mode intensively, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 77, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state B, C or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving state is continued by the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (overlapping ) may be generated or may not be generated continuously. That is, it is also possible to transition from the specific game states B and C to the specific game states B and C.

When the transition condition is established from the specific game states B and C, the state transitions to a transition state (which may be included in the normal game state) that digests the remaining hold. The transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as the transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game state A to the transition state. The transition conditions are (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of times of shortening time m3, m4 (first predetermined number of times, the initial value of the number of times of shortening time variation 2), and (ii) The second predetermined number of times (time exceeding the initial value of the shortened variation count 1). In the present embodiment, the condition (iii) of the first embodiment (completion of opening the electric power for a predetermined number of times) is not provided because it is not necessary. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the number of times of working hours reduction.

It should be noted that the number m1-m4 of time-saving modes #1-#4 and the number of ceiling times m5 can be appropriately adjusted to change the game characteristics.

For example, in order to balance the profits of the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C, m1 (a time saving number 1) < m4 (c time saving number) < m2 (a time saving number 2) < m5 (ceiling number) < You may adjust so that the relationship of m3 (b number of times of time saving) may be satisfied.

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m4 Adjustment may be made so as to satisfy the relationship of (c times of time reduction) < m5 (ceiling times) < m3 (b times of time reduction).

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m4 (c time saving number of times) < m3 (b time saving number of times) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m5 (ceiling number of times) can be adjusted to satisfy

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 78 is a table showing, in this embodiment, the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game, the specified number of remaining reservations (the number of specified remaining reservations), and the like. The pattern is a pattern for a big hit (including a V prize during a small win), and is determined by a big hit pattern random number here, and time-saving patterns are excluded.

This embodiment is the same as the first embodiment, except that the number of time reductions is different for the big hit symbol A of the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbol G of the jackpot (jackpot with remaining pending) in the special figure 2 variable display game in the state without the general electric support is the same as in the first embodiment. Regarding the jackpot (including the V prize in the small hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game with the general electric support, the number of times of time saving is fixed to 3 times, so there is only one type of pattern S .

In the normal game state (normal mode), when a big hit (symbol A) is generated by the special figure 1 variable display game, the game shifts to a specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. In the specific game state A, when a big win (symbol S) is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game, the game returns to the specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. In the specific game states B and C, when a big hit (symbol S) is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game, the game shifts to the specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A, the number of times of time saving is fixed to 3 times, and the number of prescribed remaining reservations is fixed to 4 pieces.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern variation display game and the general pattern movement in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 79(A), there is only one winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of general electric support, the probability per general pattern is always a constant value of 250/251, and unlike the first embodiment, low probability (low probability general pattern) and high probability (high probability general pattern) probability) is not controlled to vary between Incidentally, as in the first embodiment, the low probability lower than 250/251 may be set in the normal game state.

The start memory number (normal pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum count number (upper limit of count number) is 10 for general electricity.

The normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is a constant value of 500 msec. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 may be set to a value longer than 500 msec in the normal game state. The normal map stop time FZ2 (normal map display time) is 600 msec. Although not shown in FIG. 79, the total FZ3 of the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal ending time may be, for example, 700 msec that is equal to or longer than the normal electric fluctuation time FZ1 or the normal electric stop time FZ2.

As shown in FIG. 79(B), the normal variable prize winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened only once for one hit of the normal pattern variable display game to enter the winning easy state. However, the normal power release time is short (for example, 48 msec) in a state without power support such as a normal game state, and a long time (eg, 3400 msec) in a state with power support such as a short working time state. The normal/universal power release pattern (normal/universal power release mode) differs depending on the game state. As described above, the probability of winning a general pattern is always a constant value regardless of the game state, so in the present embodiment, the easy winning state of the general electricity support has a longer general electricity open time than the case without the general electricity support. It is realized by

In addition, the general electric open time may be shorter than the general electric power fluctuation time FZ1, the general electric power stop time FZ2, the general electric power remaining ball processing time and the general electric power ending time total FZ3 in the state without the electric power support. , in the state with power support, it may be longer than the time FZ1-FZ3 associated with the control of these power maps and power.

〔Timing chart〕
Figure 80 shows, from the time saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (which may be included in the normal game state), the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), the general figure state, the general electric state, the special figure 2 It is a timing chart showing the number of reservations and the like. In addition, in FIG. 80, for the sake of simplification, the timing of the end of the time saving and the start timing of the mains disconnection are aligned, but they may be shifted.

FIG. 80(A) shows a situation in which the time saving modes #1 and #2 of the specific game state A (first specific game state) following the big hit are completed and transition to the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode). In the case of FIG. 80 (A), the stop display time STP1 (first period ) is set longer than the long-term general electric open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) for general electric support. That is, the relationship STP1>OPN is set.

In addition, the game control device 100 can set the stop display time corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit (A4804). The stop display time of the final variation is also set corresponding to the type of the time saving mode (specific game state). Corresponding to the time saving mode #1, #2 (specific game state A), the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final fluctuation is set longer than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. .

In addition, in FIG. 80, the time saving final variation will be described as a variation in which the number of times of special figure 2 variation after the end of the big hit will be the number of times of time saving (three times). However, the time saving final variation may be a special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation display game), and the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) It may be the above-mentioned second predetermined number of times.

Assuming that the number of special 2 reservations is the maximum value of 4 before the start of the time saving final fluctuation, the number of special 2 reservations decreases by 1 to 3 at the time of the time saving final fluctuation of special figure 2, but the normal fluctuation winning device When the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 due to the opening of the general electric power of 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, depending on the hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure fluctuation) started at this time, even in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end becomes open.

Hypothetically, if the variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts during the long-time electric power open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving ends, the special figure 2 hold number will decrease by 1. It becomes 3, and here, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again, which is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are digested after the time saving state ends. The remaining pending number becomes 5 (1 + 4). In addition, if the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is started twice while the general electricity is open in the remaining reservation digestion mode, there is a possibility that the remaining number of reservations will be 6 (larger than 5).

Since the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1, #2) passes through the jackpot state, the player's privilege and game value are large as the number of balls released (the number of acquired balls). Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of remaining reservations does not exceed the specified number of remaining reservations of four and does not become five or more so as not to excessively give benefits or game values to the player. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation in the specific gaming state A is set to be longer than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and the remaining during the general electricity open time OPN The pending digestion (execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is prevented from being started (STP1>OPN). As a result, the number of remaining reservations can be held at four, which is the predetermined number of remaining reservations.

In addition, the normal open time (for example, 48 msec) caused by the hit result of the normal map fluctuation in the remaining hold digestion mode is the normal open time OPN ( For example, compared to 3400 msec), it is a considerably short time. For this reason, in the short-time normal power release in the remaining hold digestion mode (the normal power release after the normal power release due to the normal power release time OPN), the special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) does not accumulate and the number of remaining holds increases. Therefore, the number of remaining reservations is 4, which is the specified remaining number of reservations.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, the relationship of stricter conditions STP1 > (OPN + FZ2), or STP1 > (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN) relationship can be set, but the normal pattern fluctuation time Since FZ1 and the general power supply stop time FZ2 are considerably shorter than the general power supply open time OPN and can be ignored, by setting the relationship of STP1>OPN, the effect of keeping the number of remaining holds at 4 of the specified number of remaining holds is get enough.

On the other hand, in FIG. 80 (B), the specific game states B and C (time saving state, second specific game state) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving are completed, and the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode ). In the case of FIG. 80 (B), the stop display time STP2 (second period ) is set shorter than the long-term general electric open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) that provides general electric support. That is, the relationship STP2<OPN is set. Corresponding to time saving modes #3 and #4 (specific game states B and C), the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final fluctuation is set shorter than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. (A4804).

For this reason, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts while the electric power is open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving mode # 3 and # 4 are finished, the number of special figure 2 holds is reduced by 1 to 3. When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during this general electricity opening, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again, and it is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are digested after the time saving state ends. The remaining pending number becomes 5 (1 + 4). In addition, if the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed twice while the general electricity is open in the remaining reservation digestion mode, the remaining number of reservations will be 6 (larger than 5).

The specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) occur without going through the jackpot state, and the player's benefits and game value as the number of balls released (the number of acquired balls) are small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the possibility that the number of remaining reservations exceeds four and becomes five or more is increased so as to give the player greater benefits and game value. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP2 of the short time final variation of the specific game states B and C is set shorter than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and during the general electricity open time OPN Digestion of remaining pending (execution of special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is made easy to start (STP2<OPN).

Of course, if the game ball does not pass through the normal figure starting gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end will not cause a long electricity opening with a long electricity opening time OPN, or this long electricity The opening will be pushed forward and some will be opened before the end of the short time. In this case, even if the relationship of STP2<OPN is set, the number of remaining reservations may remain at 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and may not reach 5 or more.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, it is possible to set a looser condition STP2 < (OPN + FZ2) relationship, or STP2 < (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN) relationship, but more STP2 value By setting a strict condition STP2<OPN with a narrow range, the possibility that the number of remaining pending items will be 5 or more is surely increased.

In the present embodiment, the relationship of STP2 (second period) < OPN (third period) < STP1 (first period) is established, and the relationship of STP2 < STP1 is established regardless of the length of the mains open time OPN. holds. In this way, the stop display time STP1 (first period) of the time saving final variation in the specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) is changed to the specific game state B, C (time saving mode #3, #4). It is set longer than the stop display time STP2 of the final variation. Here, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is the same as the time from the end of the final special figure variation display game in the specific game state to the start of the next special figure variation display game when there is a remaining hold.

In addition, regardless of the open time OPN, even if the relationship of STP2<STP1 is established, the start of the remaining hold fluctuation after the end of the specific game state B, C is earlier than the case of the specific game state A, It is possible to increase the possibility that the number of remaining reserves for the specific game states B and C will be larger than for the specific game state A. - 特許庁For this reason, the difference (difference in privilege and game value) between the specific game state A in which a large number of balls are paid out through the big win state and the specific game states B and C in which small balls are paid out without going through the big win state is alleviated. can be done. Therefore, even in specific game states B and C (time saving mode #3, #4) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, such as specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) following a big hit, Benefits and game values are compensated, and interest in games increases.

In addition, when the conditions for generating the specific game state B and C are established during the specific game state A, that is, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving final fluctuation may be set to STP2 (second period), which is shorter than STP1, instead of STP1 (first period). In this case, after the big hit, the time saving state (specific game state B, C) due to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving can be continuously (overlapped) generated from the specific game state A, but the stop display time of the time saving final fluctuation is short. set to STP2, and after a series of time-saving states (specific game state A and specific game states B, C) after the big hit, after the time-saving final fluctuation, a small STP2 (second period) benefit and game value are further given, It can improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C that continue to the specific game state A ends, the system shifts to the remaining reserved consumption mode, and the time saving final fluctuations are the fluctuations in the specific game states B and C. When specific game states B and C occur from specific game state A, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2 areas are overwritten to the time reduction count (initial value of time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2) of specific game state B and C This is because the number of remaining time reductions in the specific game state A disappears. However, even if the number of time reductions in the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A is completed, the remaining number of time reductions in the specific game state A is copied to another predetermined area and remains without disappearing. In the case of , it is not necessary to return to the specific game state A from the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A, and not to shift to the transition state (residual hold digestion mode). In this case, the time saving final variation is the variation in the specific game state A. The remaining number of time reductions is smaller than the initial value of the time reduction variation number 2 for the specific game state A and greater than zero.

In addition, even if the time saving pattern (sapo hit result) that can cause the specific game state B and C is stopped and displayed during the specific game state A, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is set to STP1, which is larger than STP2, instead of STP2. can be set. Even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, in the case of a configuration (preferred configuration) that does not continuously generate the time saving state by the time saving pattern from the specific game state A, the long first period (STP1) By holding the number of remaining reservations to be consumed after the specific game state A at the specified remaining number of reservations, it is possible to prevent the specific game state A following a big win from becoming too advantageous. In addition, even in the case of such a configuration as to continuously generate the time-saving state by the time-saving pattern from the specific game state A, since the specific game state B, C passes through the specific game state A following the big hit, the specific game It is possible to prevent states B and C from becoming too advantageous.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a special figure variation display game), and when the result of the game is a special result, the player An advantageous special game state (for example, a jackpot state) can be generated. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (for example, a specific game state A) that is advantageous to the player following the special game state following the generation of the special game state, and generates the special game state. It is possible to generate a second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) that is advantageous to the player. The game control means controls the first period from the end of the final game in the first specific game state to the start of the next game (for example, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation) to the end of the final game in the second specific game state. to the start of the next game (for example, the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final variation).

In such a gaming machine 10, since the second period is shorter than the first period, after the end of the second specific game state, the starting memory (residual hold) accumulated to the maximum in the second specific game state is consumed quickly, and this It is possible to store extra starting memory (residual hold) by the amount. For this reason, the first specific game state (for example, specific game state A) in which the profit of the special game state (for example, ball output) can be obtained via the special game state, and the profit of the special game state without passing through the special game state ( For example, the difference in profit between the second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) in which no balls are obtained can be alleviated. Therefore, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, the profit is compensated and the interest in the game increases.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is convertible between an easy-win state and an easy-non-win state, and the first specific game state and the second specific game state are easier to convert to the easy-win state than the normal game state. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) is provided. A third period (for example, open-circuit time OPN) during which the variable winning device is in the easy winning state is shorter than the first period (STP1) and longer than the second period (STP2). Therefore, it is possible to hold the number of remaining reservations digested after the end of the first specific game state (for example specific game state A) to the specified number of remaining reservations, and second specific game state (for example specific game states B, C) It is possible to increase the possibility that the number of remaining reservations that will be consumed after the end of will exceed the prescribed number of remaining reservations. As a result, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, profits are ensured and the interest in the game increases.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) sets the period from the end of the final game in the first specific game state to the start of the next game to the first period (STP1). The period from the end of the final game in the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period (STP2). The game control means, when the condition for generating the second specific game state is established during the first specific game state (for example, when the ceiling number of times is reached or when the support hit result occurs), the first specific game state Alternatively, the period from the end of the final game in the specific game state as the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set not to the first period but to a second period shorter than the first period.

In such a gaming machine 10, after a series of game states including the special game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, a small second period (STP2) of special benefits and game values are further given, It can improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) can set the period from the end of the final game in the first specific game state to the start of the next game as the first period. A period from the end of the final game in the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period. The game control means, even if the result of the game that can cause the second specific game state (for example, time saving pattern, support hit result) is displayed during the first specific game state, the first specific game state or the second specific game The period from the end of the final game to the start of the next game in the specific game state as a state can be set not to the second period but to a first period (STP1) longer than the second period (STP2).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the result of the game that can generate the second specific game state is displayed, the second specific game state is not continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state. In the case of , the long first period (STP1) can prevent the first specific game state following the special game state from becoming too advantageous. Also, even in the case of a configuration in which the second specific game state is continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state, the second specific game state passes through the first specific game state following the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second specific game state from becoming too advantageous.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 98. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to a variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation pattern group) and the like for selecting a variation pattern for a variation display game.

[Game board]
The game board 30 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 shown in FIG. 81 is different from the game board 30 shown in FIG. 2 in that a normal figure start gate 34 is added in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40. . Two normal figure start gates 34 are present in the game areas 32 on the right side and the lower left side of the center case 40 . The function and configuration of the normal map starting gate 34 itself are the same as in the first embodiment. That is, inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a, the normal pattern variation display game is executed.

Since there is a normal figure start gate 34 in the lower left game area 32, even if it is a left hit (normal hit) that makes the game ball flow down on the left side of the game area 32, the game ball at the normal figure start gate 34 By passing, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed. When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a winning result, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state (easy winning state), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (general electric) is permitted. However, in order to win the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 in the right game area 32, the player must, immediately after the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 on the lower left, the shooting mode of the game ball (hitting ) is required to quickly switch from left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 on the lower left and the normal variable winning device 37 in the right game area 32 is converted to the open state, the game ball successfully enters the normal variable winning device 37. is not limited.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 82 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is similar to FIG. 77, but in the specific game state B (time reduction mode # 3) generated by reaching the ceiling number of times, the general electric support becomes high support, and the specific game state C (time reduction mode # 3) generated by the time reduction pattern 4) differs from FIG. 77 in that the general electric support becomes a medium support. In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but a part or all of the specific game state is a high-probability state with a high-probability jackpot probability (general electric support / special pattern high probability). is also possible.

In the middle support, the variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the normal game state without the normal power support (power support), but more difficult to convert to the open state than the high support. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player increases in the order of no electric support (no general electric support)<middle support<high support. In the specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the normal game state, but more difficult to convert to the open state than the specific game state B.

In addition, in the specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) that occurs following the big hit, the general electric support may be the same type of high support as the specific game state B, or another type of high support. It can be support. In other types of high supports, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the specific game state C, and is harder or easier to convert to the open state than the specific game state B. If the high supports in the specific game state A and the specific game state B are of the same type, the control becomes simple, while if they are of different types, variations in the game are produced.

In the specific game states A and B, since the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, hitting to the right aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended as the shooting mode of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game states A and B, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable The display game is a special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, as described above, the occurrence of the winning to the first start winning port 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 pending) is the first to enable execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game It is a starting condition. In addition, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the generation of the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 reservation) is the second start condition that makes it possible to execute the special figure 2 variation display game there is

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, although the normal variable winning device 37 is slightly easier to open than in the normal game state due to the middle support, if the right-handed hit is always continued during the specific game state C, the start winning opening 36 The disadvantage of not winning the prize will be bigger. For example, if the number of prizes won into the starting prize-winning port 36 per unit number of shot balls in the case of left-handed hitting is greater than the number of prizes won in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 per unit number of fired balls in the case of right-handed hitting, The disadvantage in hitting is greater than the disadvantage in hitting left-handed.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state C, left-handed hitting aiming at the starting prize-winning opening 36 is basically recommended as the shooting mode (how to hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game state C, the main starting area is the first start winning port 36 and the secondary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, so the main variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 2 variable display game.

As the production mode of the specific game state A, there are time saving modes #1 and #2 as in FIG. 71A and FIG. In the present embodiment, the numbers m1 and m2 of time saving modes #1 and #2 are fixed values of 4 times and 30 times, respectively, but they may be variable values in order to increase game variations. For example, the number of times m2 of time saving may be selected by lottery to be 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variation display game is 1/15.79, and the time saving frequency m2 is small. Therefore, in the time-saving mode #2, since a small hit (big hit state of V passage) does not occur with certainty, the next continuation fixed mode (fixed mode) does not occur.

The production mode of the specific game state B is the time saving mode #3, and the production mode of the specific game state C is the time saving mode #4. It can be distinguished from the time saving state by (c time saving) by production. Incidentally, it is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the performance mode the same in the specific game state B and the specific game state C so as to share the performance. In the present embodiment, the numbers m3 and m4 of time saving modes #3 and #4 are fixed values of 251 times and 30 times, respectively, but they may be variable in order to increase game variations. For example, there are multiple time-saving patterns such as 50 time-saving patterns, 30 time-saving patterns, and 20 time-saving patterns. A lottery may be made to set the average number of times of the number of times of shortening of working hours m4 to 30 times.

In addition, time-saving modes #3 and #4 are different production modes from time-saving modes #1 and #2. C) can be distinguished by the presentation. Incidentally, the same production mode can be used for the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C to reduce the development cost by making the production common.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described.

In this embodiment, the number of ceiling times m5 is 580 times, during the specific game state A and in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), after the end of the jackpot state under predetermined conditions (special low probability state, non-variable state state) The number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed never reaches the ceiling number of times. Therefore, there is no transition to the specific game state B from the specific game state A and the remaining pending digestion mode.

Then, in this embodiment, in the normal game state or the specific game state C, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed under predetermined conditions after the end of the jackpot state reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) Then, it transitions to the specific game state B (time saving mode # 3).

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no support hit (time saving result, time saving pattern) in the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and there is a support hit only in the result of the special figure 1 variation display game. In order to do this, the support hit determination process (A3607-A3609) is executed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 23), and conversely, the support hit determination process (A3707- A3709) is not executed. Therefore, basically, during the specific game state A in which the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), and the specific game state B, the transition to the specific game state C is not performed.

Then, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state where the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is the result of the support hit (time saving pattern), suddenly time saving (c time saving ) as a specific game state C (time saving mode # 4). In this way, in a normal game state in which the player's profit is small and the presentation tends to be monotonous, the benefit of winning the support (time-saving pattern) can be provided to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the transition condition is satisfied without occurrence of a small hit or a big hit in the specific game states B and C, the transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) for digesting the remaining reservation is made. The transition condition for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as in FIG. 77 of the second embodiment. That is, the transition conditions are (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of times of reduction in time m3, m4 (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) special figure variation in the specific gaming state Either the total number of executions of the display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) exceeds the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the number of times of time reduction m3 and m4 (first predetermined number of times) It is to be. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number or the special figure 2 reservation number to the number of times of time saving. Also, regarding the condition (i) when transitioning from the specific game state C to the transition state, even if the number of executions of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) in the specific game state C exceeds the time reduction number m4 good.

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 83 is a table showing the number of times of reduction in working hours and the prescribed number of remaining reservations corresponding to the symbols, which are the types of hits in the special figure variation display game, in the third embodiment. The pattern is a pattern in the case of a big hit (including a big hit by V winning), and the time saving pattern is excluded here.

As shown in (A), in this embodiment, in the state without general electric support, the jackpot pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game includes only the pattern A1 (mainly the jackpot in the normal game state). . Regarding the pattern A1, it is the same as the pattern A of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, except that the number of times of time saving (here, four times) is different. In addition, in the state with general electric support, there is only the pattern P1 in the jackpot pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game (mainly the jackpot in the specific game state C). Regarding the pattern P1, the number of times of time saving is 30 times (m2), and the prescribed number of remaining reservations is 4. The big-hit symbols A1 and P1 are not the big-hit by V winning, and are stop symbols determined by the big-hit symbol random numbers. It should be noted that it is possible to configure the symbol A1 and the symbol P1 to be the stop symbols of the big hit related to the V prize in the small win of the special figure 1 variable display game. , the symbol A1 and the symbol P1 may be a small-hit stop symbol determined by a small-hit symbol random number.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit in the state without the general electric support, the symbol is only the symbol A1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the normal game state, the game transitions to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A (4 times of time saving) after the big win state. In addition, the pattern P1 may be provided in addition to the pattern A1, and the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A may be made after the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game (dotted line in FIG. 82 etc.). Alternatively, a pattern P1 may be provided instead of the pattern A1, and when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the normal game state may transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A via the big win state. .

In the state with general electric support, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the symbol is only the symbol P1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the specific game state C, the game transitions to the time saving mode #2 (30 times of time saving) of the specific game state A after the big win state. In addition, a pattern A1 may be provided in addition to the pattern P1, and the transition to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A may be made after the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game. Alternatively, a pattern A1 is provided instead of the pattern P1, and when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the transition from the specific game state C to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A via the big win state is performed. good.

As in (B), regarding the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game in the state with general electric support, there is only one type of pattern S1 in which the number of times of reduction in time m2 given after the jackpot is 30 times. The allocation is 100%. In addition, in the present embodiment, the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is due to the V prize in the small hit, but it is not limited to this. In the specific game state AC with general electric support, when the special figure 2 variable display game of the main variable display game becomes a big hit, the transition to the time saving mode # 2 of the specific game state A is made. In addition to the pattern S1, two patterns are provided for the number of times of time reduction m2 of 20 times and 50 times, and one of 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times is selected as the number of times of time reduction m2 by lottery of patterns by distribution. good.

In this embodiment, the small hit probability differs between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the small hit upper limit judgment value (A3900) is the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display. It differs from game to game. The small hit probability of the special figure 2 variation display game is 1/15.79, while the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game is 1/199.80. Therefore, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) in which the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game. Compared to the normal game state and the specific game state C, it is easier to generate a small win and a big win due to the V prize in the small win.

The pattern G1 of the special figure 2 variable display game jackpot (jackpot by V winning in the small hit in the remaining reserve) in the state without the general electric support is the same as the pattern G of the first embodiment. There is only one type of pattern, that is, a pattern G1 in which the number m2 of time saving given after the big hit is 30 times, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A is made. In addition, the pattern G1 and the pattern S1 may be used as a common pattern because the pattern G1 and the pattern S1 shift to the same time-saving mode after the big hit is completed. In addition to the pattern G1, two patterns, 20 times and 50 times of the number of times of time reduction m2, are provided, and one of 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times is selected as the number of times of time reduction m2 by lottery of patterns by distribution. good. Also, a pattern A1 may be provided in addition to the pattern G1, and the transition to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A may be made (dotted line in FIG. 82).

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the normal game state, the transition state, the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the specific game state C occur based on individual occurrence conditions (transition conditions). (transition conditions) may be different from each other.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit in the specific game state C, the time saving mode is performed after the big hit is finished, as in the case where the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit (in the case of symbols S1 and G1). Transition to # 2 and get 30 times of time saving with high support. Therefore, even if the specific game state C is medium support rather than high support, it is very advantageous to the player and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, since the specific game state C of the middle support does not change to the state with the general electric support, it is treated as a consecutive chance in which the big hit state and the specific game state continue without going through the normal mode (or normal game state).

In addition, as illustrated in the pie chart of the ratio of the upper limit of the number of rounds in (C), when there are multiple upper limits of the number of rounds (number of jackpot rounds), there is a jackpot pattern corresponding to each upper limit of the number of rounds. good. For example, as in (C), when there are three types of round number upper limit values 9R, 6R, and 3R for the special figure 2 variable display game jackpot, pattern S1-9R (distribution 15%), pattern S1 -6R (10% distribution), S1-3R (distribution 75%), G1-9R (15% distribution), G1-6R (10% distribution), G1-3R (75% distribution) , there may be a symbol corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds. Incidentally, in the case of a big win due to a V prize in a small win, the small win may be regarded as one round and may be included in the round number upper limit value, or the small win may not be included in the round number upper limit value.

[Time-saving operation status]
FIG. 84 is a table summarizing the operating conditions of time saving when a new time saving action opportunity occurs from each game state. The time-saving activation trigger is a big hit if it is a time-saving (a time-saving) via a big hit, and if it is a ceiling time-saving (b time-saving), it reaches the ceiling number of times, and if it is suddenly time-saving (c), it is a time-saving pattern. setting and derivation (display).

As described above, in the normal game state (including the remaining pending digestion mode) and the specific game state AC, when a big hit occurs as a trigger for the occurrence of a time saving, a time saving is activated immediately after the big hit ends via the big hit state. Then transition to the specific game state A.

In the normal game state (including the remaining hold digestion mode), the specific game state A, and the specific game state C, when the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for b time saving, b time saving is activated and it is possible to transition to specific game state B is. However, in the specific game state B, even if the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for b time saving, the new ceiling time saving activation flag (A5115) is not generated, and the new b time saving is inoperable. In this way, it is prohibited to repeatedly generate b time saving in the specific game state B, to prevent the situation in which the specific game state B is substantially extended, and to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous. can. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the number of times ceiling cannot be reached in the specific game state A and the remaining hold digestion mode, the transition from the specific game state A and the remaining hold digestion mode in the normal game state to the specific game state B never do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

In addition, as described above, when the ceiling number of times is reached, the middle support specific game state C (c time reduction) transitions to the high support specific game state B (b time reduction), the production mode is from time saving mode # 4 to time saving mode # 3 , and the performance changes. Also, in this case, the method of hitting the game ball is switched from the left-hand hitting state in which left-hand hitting is recommended to the right-hand hitting state in which right-hand hitting is recommended, and the main variation display game changes from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation. Switch to display game.

In addition, in the normal game state (excluding the remaining hold digestion mode), when the time saving pattern is derived at the support hit as a trigger for c time saving, c time saving is activated and transitions to specific game state C. However, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the remaining hold digestion mode of the normal game state, the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and as described above, the special figure 2 variation display Since support hits (time saving patterns) do not occur in the game, c time saving does not operate and transition to specific game state C does not occur. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, even if the time saving pattern is derived as a trigger for c time saving by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, for example, the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuation setting (A5126) and support operation By not executing the setting process (A5127), the operation of the c time saving is prohibited and the new c time saving is made inoperable. In this way, it is possible to prohibit the repeated occurrence of c time reduction in the specific game state C, eliminate the situation in which the specific game state C is substantially extended, and prevent the player from being excessively advantageous. In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived in the specific game state C, it is also possible to reset the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations, execute the support operation setting process, and operate a new c time saving. However, even in this configuration, if the remaining number of times of time saving is larger than the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuation (the number of times of time saving of new c time saving), the remaining number of times of saving time will suddenly decrease, so a new c You may disable the time saver and cancel it.

In addition, in the specific game states A and B, if the start winning port 36 is won and there is no special figure 2 start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game may be executed, but the c time saving operation is forcibly prohibited It is also possible not to transition to the specific game state C by pressing. In order to do this, in the specific game states A and B, even if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a support hit (time saving pattern), the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is set (A5126) and the support operation The configuration is such that the setting process (A5127) is not executed.

[Display of collective display device]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the display of the collective display device 50 regarding the third embodiment. The display of the collective display device 50 other than the display shown in FIG. 85 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

In this embodiment, since there is no probability variable state of special figure high probability, unlike the first embodiment, the LED lamp D9 (third game state display unit 59) is the LED lamp D7 (first game state display unit 57) and Similarly, lighting or extinguishing informs that it is right-handed or left-handed (normal hitting).

In the state without general power support (no power support), that is, in the normal game state or transition state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50 are extinguished to indicate the left-handed state (normal hitting state), The LED lamp D17 of the collective display device 50 is also extinguished to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not in operation (that is, the non-time saving state).

In the specific game state C, which is c time saving, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are extinguished to indicate that it is in a left-handed state (normal hitting state), while the LED lamp D17 is lit to indicate that the variable time reduction function is operating (i.e. It indicates that it is a time saving state). However, exceptionally, if a normal pattern variation display game hit (normal pattern hit) occurs during c time saving (specific game state C), the normal pattern is stopped at the timing of the winning pattern, right hand hitting state in which the general electricity is released LED lamps D7 and D9 as right-handed LEDs light up to indicate that. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 in the lower left game area 32 in the left-handed state, the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed becomes a hit, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by the middle support. When converting to a state, an instruction (suggestion) to hit to the right is notified to the player.

In the specific game state C, the display device 41 shows left-handed instruction display and right-handed, corresponding to the left-handed state and right-handed state indicated by the LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50. You may display the right-handed instruction|indication display which instruct|indicates. By doing so, even an inexperienced player can easily grasp right-handed hitting, and can easily receive the benefit of opening the general electric power supply by the middle support. It should be noted that the right-handed instruction display on the display device 41 is displayed not at the timing when the LED lamps D7 and D9 are turned on, but at the timing when the normal variable prize winning device 37 (general electricity) is actually opened so as to benefit the player. may be Also, in the specific game state C, when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is a short time (for example, 50 msec or less) per normal pattern (in the case of a normal electric opening pattern H1 described later), so as not to disappoint the player. , the indication of hitting to the right may not be displayed on the display device 41 .

In addition, in the specific game state C, the right-handed state where right-handed is recommended occurs exceptionally. At 41, a left-handed instruction display may be displayed. In this way, since a skilled player hits to the right in response to the opening of the general electric power supply, it becomes easier to receive benefits from the medium support, and there is a possibility that the operation of the gaming machine 10 will improve as the player tries to increase his skill level. be.

Further, in the specific game state C, since the left-handed state is normal, the left-handed instruction display may not be displayed on the display device 41 so as not to make the player uncomfortable. The left-handed instruction display may be displayed on the display device 41 only for a predetermined period when the transition is made.

Furthermore, in the specific game state A that is a time saving and the specific game state B that is b time saving, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that it is a right-handed state, and the LED lamp D17 is lit to shorten the fluctuation time. Indicates that the function is active.

During the big win state and the small win game state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate a right-handed state, and the LED lamp D17 is extinguished to indicate a state in which the variable time reduction function is not activated (that is, a non-time-saving state). indicates that It should be noted that, exceptionally, in the specific game state, during a short-time small hit game state without V winning due to the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (while the small hit is open in FIG. 98), the variable time shortening function is set. In order to keep it operating without turning it off (without saving the time saving flag), the LED lamps D7 and D9 light up to indicate that it is hitting right, and the LED lamp D17 lights up to activate the variable time reduction function. Indicates that it is in a state (that is, a time saving state). In addition, during a long-time small-hit game state due to the small-hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game (during the small-hit opening in Fig. 98), the V prize is surely generated and the big hit is achieved, so the variable time reduction function is turned off. Then (by saving the time saving flag), the LED lamp D17 is turned off to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not in operation (that is, the non-working time saving state).

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 are diagrams showing the characteristics of the general pattern variation display game and the general pattern movement in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 86, there are three types of winning symbols (hitting stop symbols, normal winning symbols) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of general electric support, the probability per normal pattern is always a constant value 250/251, and changes between low probability (low probability normal pattern) and high probability (high probability normal pattern) not controlled as such. In addition, it is good also as a low probability lower than 250/251 in the specific game state C of normal game state or middle support.

The start memory number (normal pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum count number (upper limit of count number) for general electric is 5. The normal pattern stop time (normal pattern display time) is 600 msec regardless of the game state.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 5000 msec in the normal game state and the transition state without the general electric support (electric support), and 4900 msec in the c specific game state C, and a short time. It is 200 msec in the specific game state A of b and the specific game state B of b time saving. Normal figure fluctuation time is shortened in the order of no electric support (normal game state, transition state)> medium support (specific game state C)> high support (specific game state A, B). In this way, in the specific game state C of the medium support, compared to the normal game state and the transition state without the general power support (low support), it is a little easier to enter the general power winning easy state (open state). , In the specific game states A and B of high support, it is extremely easy to enter the easy win state of the general electric power. In addition, normal pattern fluctuation time is set based on the support state (that is, no power support, medium support, high support) corresponding to each game state in normal pattern normal processing (A7920 in FIG. 46).

As shown in FIG. 87(A), by a lottery based on the distribution of 65521 normal pattern winning pattern random numbers (A7710), the winning stop pattern number 1 corresponding to the winning 1 pattern is set with a probability of 65321/65521. A winning stop pattern number 2 corresponding to a winning 2 symbol is set with a probability of /65521, and a winning stopping pattern number 3 corresponding to a winning 3 symbol is set with a probability of 100/65521 (A7912).

Depending on the combination of lighting / extinguishing of the LED lamps D8, D10, D18 of the variable display unit 53 for the normal pattern variation display game, the winning 1 pattern is (light off, lit, light off), and the winning 2 pattern is (light off, light off, lights up), and the winning 3 symbols are displayed like (lights out, lights up, lights up). In addition, the lost symbols of the lost stop symbol number (A7909) which is the stop symbol number 0 are displayed like (light off, light off, light off).

The general electric open pattern is an open mode of the ordinary fluctuation prize winning device 37 (universal electric) per one general pattern. In the normal time, that is, in the normal game state and the transition state, the general electric open pattern is a pattern H1 of short electric open once for all symbols of 1 to 3 hits, and the pattern H1 is 100% probability. There is no public electricity support because it is selected (no electricity support). In addition, in the specific game state A (a time reduction) and the specific game state B (b time reduction), the general electric open pattern is a pattern H3 of long electric open once for all patterns of 1 to 3, Since the pattern H3 is selected with a probability of 100%, the support is high.

On the other hand, in the specific game state C (c short time), the normal electric open pattern is the pattern H1 for the winning 1 symbol, and the normal electric 2 times open pattern H2 for the winning 2 and 3 symbols. H1 and pattern H2 are mixed. The pattern H1 of short-time normal/universal open once is selected with a probability of 65321/65521×100%, and the pattern H2 of normal/electrical open twice is selected with a probability of 200/65521×100%. In this way, in the specific game state C, the selection probability of the pattern H1 in which the mains are open for a shorter time than the pattern H2 is much higher than the selection probability of the pattern H2. In the medium support (specific game state C), by making it slightly more advantageous than without the electric support (normal game state), the profit on the player side and the game center side are improved so that the profit on the player side does not become too large. adjusting profits.

In addition, as described above, since the patterns corresponding to wins 2 and 3 are the same in each game state, wins 2 and 3 may be combined into one win.

As shown in FIG. 87(B), in the short time opening pattern H1, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a short time. In pattern H1, the normal electric open time (A8407) is 36msec, the normal electric remaining ball processing time (A8708) is 600msec, the normal electric ending time (A8903) is 100msec, and after the normal electric ending, the next normal electric change display game is possible. The recovery time up to is 4 msec (interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing).

In the pattern H2 of opening the electric power twice, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is opened twice, and the opening time of the electric power is 36 msec for the first opening and 1624 msec for the second opening. The normal/commercial open time (A8407) for the first opening is the same as the normal/commercial open time of 36 msec in pattern H1. In the first opening, the pattern H2 is indistinguishable from the pattern H1, but in the second opening, the player is surprised and the amusement of the game is improved. The power open time for the second open (A8704) is considerably longer than the power open time for the first open. In pattern H2, the electrical open time of the second open (1624 msec) or the total open time of the first and second open times (36 msec+1624 msec) is longer than the electrical open time of 36 msec in pattern H1. In addition, the normal electric remaining ball processing time, the normal drawing ending time, and the return time of pattern H2 are the same as those of pattern H1, and the control of the normal electric is simplified.

Furthermore, in pattern H2, the wait time (A8702) between the first and second openings is longer than the first and second electrical opening times, eg, 3000 msec. The player who confirmed the passage of the game ball to the lower left normal starting gate 34 and the opening of the first normal electric current has a margin to switch from left hitting to right hitting due to this long wait time, and the second time It is possible to hit right in time for the opening of the discharge. The total time (36 msec + 3000 msec + 1624 msec + 704 msec) from the start of the mains disconnection to the completion of the return time of pattern H2 is longer than the total time (36 msec + 704 msec) of pattern H1 and the total time (2800 msec + 704 msec) of pattern H3.

In the long-time open pattern H3, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a long time. The electrical open time (A8407) of pattern H3 is 2800 msec, which is longer than the electrical open time of pattern H1 (36 msec). ). Therefore, the pattern H3 makes it easier to win a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 than the patterns H1 and H2. The normal electric remaining ball processing time, the normal drawing ending time, and the return time of pattern H3 are the same as those of patterns H1 and H2, and the control of the normal electric is simplified.

As described above, the total open time of the general electric power increases in the order of pattern H1 < pattern H2 < pattern H3, and the selection probability of pattern H1 having the shortest total open time is no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game state A, B). Then, the selection probability of the pattern H1 is 100% without the electric support, and the selection probability of the pattern H3 is 100% with the high support. In addition, as described above, the normal figure fluctuation time decreases in the order of no electric sapo > medium sapo > high sapo. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player increases in the order of no electrical support<intermediate support<high support.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the general electric open time, the hit start pointer value, and the hit end pointer value are the general pattern stop pattern information (hit 1-3 symbols), and the support state ( (A8405-A8407 in FIG. 49, A8704 in FIG. 51). Therefore, with respect to the pattern H1 when the general voltage is disconnected, the pattern H2 when the normal voltage is disconnected, and the pattern H3 when the normal voltage is disconnected, the normal voltage disconnection time is set for each of the patterns H1 to H3. Then, regarding the pattern H1 and the pattern H3, the win start pointer value and the win end pointer value are set to the same value (here, 0), and the general electricity is opened only once. Furthermore, regarding the pattern H3, the winning start pointer value and the winning end pointer value are set to different values (here, 0 and 2), and the general electricity is opened twice.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the pattern H2 is the only pattern that has the second normal open. , And, only for the support state (middle support) corresponding to the specific game state C, that is, only for the pattern H2, it is set by the general electric operation transition setting process (A8702 and A8704 in FIG. 51).

Normal electric remaining ball processing time and normal drawing ending time are related to normal drawing stop pattern information (1-3 hits) and support state according to each game state (no electric support, medium support, high support) The same value is set (A8708 in FIG. 51, A8903 in FIG. 52) regardless of which pattern H1 to H3 is. However, these may be set corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information and the support state.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process according to the third embodiment. Special figure information setting processing is executed in special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3404, A3504). Note that in the processing of FIG. 88, unlike FIG. 28 of the first embodiment, the first half variation and the second half variation are not distinguished for simplicity, but they may be distinguished.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection pointer table (A14201), and uses this variable group selection pointer table to obtain a variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A14202). As shown in FIG. 82, production modes such as normal mode, remaining hold consumption mode, time saving mode #1-#4, etc. correspond to each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state AC). Therefore, by the processing of step A14202, a variation pattern table is set according to each game state as described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the variation group selection offset table (A14203), and uses this variation group selection offset table to obtain the offset data corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag and the stop symbol pattern (A14204 ).

The fluctuation pattern discrimination flag indicates the pattern of the fluctuation to be started (special figure 1 or special figure 2), and whether the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game or a special figure 2 fluctuation display game. discriminate. Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, the variation pattern table can be made different between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game as described later. Also, the stop symbol pattern corresponds to the result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit, support hit, loss). Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, it is possible to vary the variation pattern table corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game.

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A14205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information area as the variation distribution information (A14206).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. Variation pattern setting processing is executed in special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing (A3406, A3506). Note that in the processing of FIG. 89, unlike FIG. 29 of the first embodiment, the first half variation and the second half variation are not distinguished for simplicity, but they may be distinguished. For simplicity, only one variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) out of variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is used.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable selection address table (variation group table) (A14301). Then, the address of the fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, fluctuation selection table) corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information (A14206) is acquired and prepared (A14302). Here, the variation pattern table is a variation pattern group consisting of a group of one or more variation patterns (variation numbers), and is set by obtaining its address (for example, top address). As described above, in the special figure information setting process (FIG. 88), the fluctuation distribution information is set based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state, the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag, and the stop symbol pattern. For this reason, each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state AC), special figure type (type of special symbol: special figure 1 or special figure 2), result of special figure fluctuation display game (jackpot, A variation pattern table (variation pattern group) can be set corresponding to small hits, support hits, and losses.

After that, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A14303). Then, the allocation processing (A14304) is performed, and the variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the variation number area (A14305). The variation number is associated with a predetermined variation pattern, and indicates a predetermined variation pattern (for example, normal reach loss A, SP3 reach big hit B, etc.). In this way, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation number as the variation pattern is set by the allocation process as a lottery based on the variation pattern table.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The fluctuation start information setting process is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3407, A3507). In FIG. 90, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 32 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. Unlike FIG. 32 of the first embodiment, the process of FIG. 90 does not distinguish between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation for the sake of simplicity, but they may be distinguished.

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is the time saving mode #1 or the remaining pending digestion mode. (A4600c). In the case of the time saving mode # 1 or the remaining pending digestion mode (the result of A4600c is "Y"), the variation time value corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit Save in the special game processing timer area (A4615). As a result, in the time-saving mode # 1 or the remaining pending digestion mode, in the case of loss (no support hit), the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set for each special figure 2 fluctuation number after the end of the big hit Rotational speed control is performed. There is a possibility that the interest in the game can be improved by controlling the number of rotations in the time saving mode #1 or the remaining hold digestion mode.

It should be noted that, in step A4600c, instead, it is determined whether it is the specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) or the remaining pending digestion mode, and in the specific game state A or the remaining pending digestion mode, In this case, rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game may be performed. Alternatively, in step A4600c, it is determined only whether or not it is the remaining pending digestion mode, and only in the remaining pending digestion mode, if it is out, the rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. good too. In step A4600c, it is determined only whether or not it is the time saving mode #1, and only in the time saving mode #1, if it is lost, the rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game may be performed .

When the variation display game to be started is not the special figure 2 variation display game but the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is small. If it is a hit or a big hit (result of A4600b is "Y"), or if it is neither time saving mode #1 nor remaining reservation digestion mode (result of A4600c is "N"), execute the processing of steps A14601-A14605 do.

The game control device 100 clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random number 2 (A14601). Then, the variable time value table is set (A14602), and the variable time value corresponding to the variation number indicating the variation pattern is obtained using the variable time value table (A14603). Thereby, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is obtained. Subsequently, the variable time value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A14604). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation number (that is, variation pattern) is prepared as an effect command (A14605). Thereby, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the next effect command setting process (A4610).

In FIG. 90, the processing of steps A4600a, A4600b, A4600c, A4615, and A4616 may be omitted, and the variation time value corresponding to the variation number (variation pattern) may be acquired in all cases (A14603).

[Setting status of fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 91 shows the setting status of the variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation selection table, variation pattern group) (A14302) set based on the processing of FIGS. It is a table shown for (special figure 1 or special figure 2). As described above, in order to select the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) by lottery, the special figure 1 variation pattern table is set, and the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game ) to select the variation pattern by lottery, the special figure 2 variation pattern table is set.

The special figure 1 variation pattern table related to the special figure 1 variation display game is a normal game state (normal mode) without electric support, a specific game state C (time saving mode # 4) with medium support, and a specific game with high support In state B (time saving mode #3), the same common variation pattern table A is set (A14302). Then, with reference to this variation pattern table A, the variation pattern (variation number) of the special figure 1 variation display game is selected by lottery in the distribution process (A14304).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern table related to the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern table A is set in the same way as the special figure 1 variation pattern table in the normal game state. On the other hand, unlike the normal game state, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the common same variation pattern table C is set for the special figure 2 variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 82, when transitioning from the specific game state C to the specific game state B due to reaching the ceiling number of times, since there is no change in the time saving state (time saving mode), the same special figure type fluctuation display game ( Regarding the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game), if the variation pattern table is kept the same without changing, there is little discomfort, and the game rules are not violated. If the variation pattern table is made the same, the variation pattern or the variation time value of the variation display game is made common, and the sense of discomfort is reduced.

Therefore, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the common same variation pattern table A is set as the special figure 1 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group), and the special figure 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group), the same common variation pattern table C is set. Also, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state C, there is no change in the fact that the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game in the left-handed state, so that there is little discomfort. With the specific game state C, the common same variation pattern table A will be set as the special figure 1 variation pattern table.

In addition, when transitioning from the specific game state C to the specific game state B, the type (state) of the general electric support transitions from medium support to high support, and the content of the game changes greatly. It is preferable to clearly switch the type of variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game in the game state C and the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific game state B) according to the change in the general electric support. Therefore, in both the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special figure 1 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group) and the special figure 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group) are the variation pattern table A and the variation Like pattern table C, different ones are set.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 91, in the specific game state A (a time saving, time saving mode # 1, # 2), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table ensures commonality of production by a common fluctuation pattern and development cost For reduction, the variation pattern table A may be used as in the specific game states B and C, or a variation pattern table other than A may be used to increase the variation of effects. Similarly, in the specific game state A, the special figure 2 variation pattern table may be the same variation pattern table C as in the specific game states B and C to ensure commonality of effects and reduce costs, or to increase the variation of effects. Other than the pattern table C may be used.

Alternatively, the special figure 1 variation pattern table is the same variation pattern table as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure the commonality of the production by the common variation pattern and reduce the development cost in the time saving mode # 2 of the specific game state A. A may be used, and in the time saving mode #1, the number of time saving times is extremely small compared to the time saving mode #2 and the specific game states B and C, so a variation pattern table other than A may be used to distinguish the performance. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern table may be the same variation pattern table C as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure commonality of production and reduce development costs in time saving mode # 2, and in time saving mode # 1 , a table other than the variation pattern table C may be used to distinguish the effect.

Also, the setting of the variation pattern table in FIG. 91 may be the same regardless of the result of the variation display game. Alternatively, the setting of the variation pattern table in FIG. 91 may be changed according to the result of the variation display game (big hit, small win, support hit, loss). For example, when the result of the variation display game is lost, it is as shown in FIG. 91, but in the case of a small hit or a big hit, a common variation pattern table D is used regardless of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the game state. Therefore, regardless of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 or the game state, the variation pattern or the variation time value may be made common.

[Example of production screen]
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an effect screen as a display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment. (A) shows the production screen of the normal mode, which is the production mode of the normal game state without general electric support, and (B) shows the production screen of the time saving mode # 4, which is the production mode of the specific game state C of the medium support. indicates

In FIG. 92A, "high school mode", "high school stage", etc. are displayed as a mode display 679 corresponding to the normal mode, and a background image simulating a school is displayed. Although the mode display 679 and the background image are still images here, they may be moving images. The variation number display 677 is "95G", indicating that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 95 (excluding the number of times in the probability variation state). In addition, the variable count display 677 may indicate the remaining number of games up to the ceiling count (peak count−execution count). In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the numbers "4" and special figure 2 indicating the special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) respectively The number "0" indicating the number of reservations (special figure 2 start memory number) is displayed.

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a, a right pattern 611b, and a middle pattern 611c can be variably displayed as decorative special patterns (large patterns). The left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are respectively displayed in the left variation display area 610A, the right variation display area 610B, and the center variation display area 610C. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of seven patterns (decoration identification patterns) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7 appear in order on the display screen and are scrolled across the display screen in the vertical direction (vertical direction). After moving, it disappears from the display screen. In order to save the display area, the middle pattern 611c is displayed in a different direction from the vertical scrolling of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b, and is variably displayed by the rotation fluctuation visually recognized by the player as if it rotates around the axis. be done. Note that instead of rotational variation, front-back variation (back-and-forth scrolling) may be performed in which a series of overlapping patterns appear to move back and forth using a perspective method or the like. In addition, the middle pattern 611c may be vertically scrolled like the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b.

The left pattern 611a is composed of a character image 612a (character component, character portion) representing a character and a character image 613a (character component, character portion) representing a number (character). In order to shorten the width of the entire left pattern 611a, the character image 612a and the character image 613a are arranged so that their centers are aligned substantially in the scroll direction (vertical direction), and the character image 613a is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612a. To position. Similarly, the right design 611b is composed of a character image 612b representing a character and a character image 613b representing a number. In order to shorten the width of the entire right pattern 611b, the character image 612b and the character image 613b are arranged so that their centers are aligned substantially in the scroll direction (vertical direction), and the character image 613b is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612b. do. Also, in order to save the display area, the middle pattern 611c is composed only of a character image 613c representing numbers.

In the normal mode, a plurality of numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information are, for example, 1 (green), 2 (blue), 3 (orange), 4 (blue), 5 (green), 6 (blue) ) and 7 (orange), but at least one number has a different color. Even numbers may be of the same color (cold color). The odd numbers are a different color than the even numbers and may include multiple colors such as green (neutral colors) and orange (warm colors). Also, in the present embodiment, when the decorative special pattern includes a character and a number, the character corresponds to the number one-to-one and differs for each number. However, the same character is used for different numbers. may

Four pending displays 682a (first pending display) are displayed in the first pending display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) before execution of the variable display game as the first pending display. be done. The pending display 682a has a display mode imitating playing cards. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, the variable pending display 682b showing the variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed (the starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) was turned over. It is displayed in a display mode imitating playing cards. Note that the pedestal may indicate the reserved digestion region 640 . In addition, nothing is displayed here in the second suspension display portion 630b that displays the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the second retention display (second start memory display). do not have.

In FIG. 92B, the background image (background movie) of the moving image (movie) is displayed on the full screen of the display device 41 . In addition, as a mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support, "transcendence mode", "transcendence area", etc. are displayed at two opposing places, the upper left corner and the lower right corner. Since the plurality of mode displays 679 are displayed on the layer behind the pending display 682a, the mode display 679 in the lower right corner is hidden behind the pending display 682a on the front layer. However, the player can fully recognize the current rendering mode by the mode display 679 in the upper left corner that is not hidden by the hold display 682a. The mode display 679 is displayed in an oblique direction different from the horizontal direction in FIG. 92(A), and may be moved obliquely in a belt-like area independently of or part of the moving image of the background image. In this way, since the aspect of the mode display 679 is clearly different between the time saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from the normal mode and visually recognized.

The number-of-variations display 677 is "124G", indicating that the number of executions of the special-figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 124. The remaining number of times display 696 in the upper right corner of the display screen displays the remaining number of time-savings, that is, the number of variable display games that can be executed in the time-saving mode #4. In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 reservation number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reservation number respectively is displayed. In addition, since it is a medium support, there are many cases where the number of the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 becomes other than "0" due to the winning of the normal variable winning device 37.

In time-saving mode #4 of the middle support in FIG. 92(B), similarly to the normal mode in FIG. is displayed fluctuating with . However, in FIG. 92(B), a variation mode different from that in FIG. 92(A) may be used so that it can be seen that it is the middle support. 611b may be variably displayed with rotational variation.

In the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support in FIG. 92(B), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are composed of a character image showing a character and a character image showing a number as in the normal mode of FIG. 92(A). be. The medium pattern 611c is composed only of a character image 613c representing a number. However, in FIG. 92(B), in order to make it clear that it is a middle support, a configuration mode of a decorative special pattern different from that in FIG. 92(A) may be used. Well, the left design 611a and the right design 611b may be composed only of character images. In addition, when using the same character for the same number in the time saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the display mode may be changed within the range in which the same character can be recognized by the common feature.

Also, in the medium support time saving mode # 4, the multiple numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information are, for example, 1 (red), 2 (red), 3 (red), 4 (red), 5 (red) ), 6 (red), and 7 (red). The color of the character is also the same color (red) as the number. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to understand that it is the time-saving mode #4 with the middle support, which is different from the normal mode without the general power support. Also, to make it easier to understand that it is time saving mode # 4, the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 such as the upper production unit 40c and the side production unit 40d, and the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b It may emit light in the same color as the number (red). In addition, since time saving mode # 4 and normal mode are in common left-handed state and special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation display game, make it easy to visually distinguish time saving mode # 4 from normal mode is important.

In addition, in the time saving mode # 4, in the first suspension display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the first hold display, the hold display 682a (first 1 pending display) are displayed four times. However, unlike the normal mode of FIG. 92(A), the pending display 682a has a star-shaped display mode. Also by this, time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from normal mode. Further, in the pending digestion area 640, a variable pending display 682b indicating variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is displayed in a star-shaped display mode.

In addition, when there is a prize to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the middle support, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is set as the second hold display (second start memory display). 2 may be displayed in the pending display portion 630b. Alternatively, the distinction between the second pending display portion 630b and the first pending display portion 630a may be eliminated, and the second pending display may be displayed in a common pending display portion (standby area) together with the first pending display.

In addition, in the middle support time saving mode # 4, unlike the normal mode without the general power support, the upper production unit 40 c is placed in front of the player side of the display screen of the display device 41 as a movable accessory (movable member). , vibrating slowly and repeatedly up and down along the display screen. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game with respect to the time saving mode #4 which is an intermediate support and can shift to the time saving mode #2 of 30 times of time saving. In addition, by providing an effect that can appear in the time saving mode #4 but does not appear in the normal mode (operation effect of the upper effect unit 40c), the time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from the normal mode. In addition, the upper effect unit 40c may operate from the start of the variation of the decorative special symbol in the special symbol variation display game, and may stop the operation when the variation ends or when the predetermined effect occurs.

Furthermore, in the time saving mode #4 of the middle support, some of the effects (notice effects) that can appear in the normal mode do not appear. Effects that can appear in normal mode but do not appear in time-saving mode #4 include changes to a specific mode of pending display in the pending change notice, pre-reading effects due to the movement of movable characters, certain types of dialogue notices, There are certain types of step-up productions and the like.

Above, I explained the difference in production between the medium support time reduction mode # 4 and the normal mode. Time saving mode #4 may be easily distinguished from time saving modes #2 and #3. For example, between time saving mode # 4 and time saving mode # 2, # 3, the display mode of mode display 679, the background image, the configuration mode and variation mode of the decorative special pattern, the number color and character color of the decorative special pattern , and possible effects may be changed.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 93A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment. External information editing processing is executed in timer interrupt processing (A1319). In addition, in FIG. 93A, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 54B of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

If the time saving signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A9527), and then determines whether or not the time saving mode #3 (during b time saving, specific game state B) (A9528a ). In addition, the timer initial value of the time saving signal control timer is set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A5302 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 37) (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec). If the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "N"), the process proceeds to step A9528c.

When the game control device 100 is in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9528a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 (A9528b). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (result of A9528b is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9528b is "N"), big hit 3 The ON data of the signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9529), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, at the start of the ceiling time saving (b time saving) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. . After that, the output of the ON data of the big hit 3 signal continues only during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area.

If the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode #3 (result of A9528a is "N"), it determines whether it is other than the time saving mode #4 (during c time saving, specific game state C) (A9528c). When it is in a game state other than time saving mode #4 (specific game state C) (the result of A9528c is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and when it is time saving mode #4 (specific game state C) Then (the result of A9528c is "N"), the ON data of the 4 jackpot signals are saved in the external information output data area (A9530), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, at the start of a sudden time saving (c time saving) due to a time saving pattern (sapo hit), the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is sent to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. output. After that, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal continues during the time saving mode #4 (specific game state C).

In addition, the game control device 100 may also add a determination as to whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 in step A9528c. That is, in step A9528c, it may be determined whether the time saving mode is other than #4 or the time saving signal control timer is zero. In this way, the on-data of the jackpot 4 signal is output only during the timer initial value (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec) from the start of the time saving mode #4 (specific game state C).

[Output of jackpot signal (external information)]
FIG. 93B is a time chart showing the ON/OFF states of jackpot 1-4 signals as external information. (I) shows the state before and after entering b time saving (that is, before and after reaching the ceiling number of times). (II) shows the state before and after entering the c time saving (that is, before and after the time saving pattern derivation).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, and jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the machine type. In this embodiment, the big win 1 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win, and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. The big win 2 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. Furthermore, the big win 2 signal is turned on at the start of time saving of high support (excluding time saving of medium support) and turned off at the end of the remaining hold digestion mode (when the variable display game relating to the last remaining hold is stopped).

The big win 3 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win, and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. Furthermore, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on at the start of b time reduction (ceiling time reduction) and turned off after a short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) has elapsed. The jackpot 4 signal is turned on at the start of the short working hours of the medium support (excluding the short working hours of the high support) and turned off at the end of the short working hours of the medium support.

In FIG. 93B (I), when entering b time saving by reaching the ceiling number of times, the game state changes from the normal game state to the specific game state B. When entering b time saving of high sapo, ON data of 2 jackpot signals (2 jackpot signals in ON state) are output as a signal related to the start of time saving. The output of the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time until the end of the remaining pending digestion mode, that is, until the last variable display game related to the remaining pending is stopped.

Moreover, if it rushes into b time saving, the ON data of 3 jackpot signals will be output to an external device for a short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) by the process of FIG. 93A. As a result, the external device can recognize the occurrence of b time saving or the number of times of reaching the ceiling, distinguishing from the occurrence of time saving (a time saving) or c time saving due to a big hit. In addition, the external device can distinguish between the case where the big win 3 signal is generated by the big win or the small win (when it continues for a long time) and the case where the big win 3 signal is generated by b time reduction (when it continues for a short time). can.

In addition, in FIG. 93B(I), the big win 1 signal and the big win 4 signal remain off because the big win, the small win, and the short time c do not occur.

In FIG. 93B (II), if it rushes into c time-saving (suddenly time-saving) by the time-saving design, the ON data of 4 jackpot signals will be output to an external device by the process of FIG. 93A. As a result, the external device can recognize the occurrence of c (specific game state C) or the derivation of time saving symbols, distinguishing from the occurrence of time saving (a time saving) or b time saving due to a big hit. The output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signals continues for a long time until the end of the short time c (specific game state C).

In addition, in FIG. 93B (II), since the big win, the small win, and the short time b do not occur, the big win 1 signal, the big win 2 signal, and the big win 3 signal remain off. In addition, even if it enters into the short time c of the medium sapo, the on data of the two jackpot signals generated in the short time of the high sapo (two jackpot signals in the on state) will not be output.

[Output of test signal]
FIG. 94A shows, as a test signal output to the test firing test device, a normal symbol 1 high probability state signal (1 bit), a normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal (1 bit), a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal ( 1 bit), easy winning state signals 1 to 4 (4 bits), and easy winning state determination signal (1 bit). FIG. 94B exemplifies winning easy state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support.

Normal electric accessories 1 open extended state signal, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, etc. Normal electric normal state signal indicating the state of normal electric power and the state of normal electric power fluctuation is easy to win The state signals 1 to 4 can be turned on at the same time or with a delay. The easy winning state determination signal can be turned on at the same time as or with a delay from the easy winning state signals 1 to 4, and the time difference between the ON timings of the easy winning state determination signal and the easy winning state signals 1 to 4 may be 0 msec or more.

FIG. 94A particularly illustrates a case where the game state transitions in the order of normal game state → specific game state C (middle support, c short time) → specific game state B (high support, b short time) → jackpot state or transition state. do.

In the normal game state, when the time-saving pattern is derived by hitting the support of the special figure 1 variable display game, the specific game state C occurs, and the type of the general electric support becomes the medium support (winning easy state 2). At this time, first, the 4-bit win easy state signals 1 to 4 indicating the type of the general electric support are changed from the indefinite state to 01H corresponding to the medium support, and output to the test firing test device. Subsequently, an easy winning state determination signal indicating that the general power support state (easy winning state) has been determined is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and output to the test firing test device. Next, a normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal indicating that the general electric opening time is longer, and a normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal indicating that the general pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the normal game state, It is output to the test firing test device as a state signal indicating the state of the general electric power and the state of the general electric power map fluctuation. In FIG. 94A, the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 → the winning easy state determination signal → the electric/general map state signal are changed in this order.

After that, when the number of times of the special figure variation display game executed under a predetermined condition (special figure low probability state) after the end of the jackpot state in the specific game state C reaches the ceiling number, the specific game state B occurs, and the general electric support becomes a high support (easy winning state 1). At this time, the 4-bit prize easy state signals 1 to 4 indicating the type of general electric support are changed from 01H corresponding to medium support to 00H corresponding to high support and output to the test firing tester. Subsequently, an easy winning state determination signal indicating that the general electric support state (easy winning state) has been determined is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and output to the test firing test device. Then, the normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal and the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal are continuously maintained on from the specific game state C and output to the test-firing test device.

After that, when transitioning from the specific game state B to the jackpot state or the transition state, the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 become indeterminate, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal and the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal are turned off. becomes.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the probability per normal pattern does not change and is always a constant value 250/251, so the probability per normal pattern is higher than normal. The probability state signal is not turned on. However, when the normal pattern hit probability becomes high only at the time of high support, the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal is changed to ON as shown by the dotted line and is output to the test firing test device. When the normal pattern per probability is high in both the middle support and the high support, during the same period as the ON period of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal and normal pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal pattern 1 The high-probability state signal is turned on and output to the sighting test equipment.

95 and 96 are a table and a time chart showing how firing position designation signal 1 and firing position designation signal 2 are output as test signals to be output to the test-firing test apparatus. Both the shooting position specifying signal 1 and the shooting position specifying signal 2 are signals indicating a right-handed shot in which a game ball should be shot to the game area 32 on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the medium support (specific game state C), when the general electricity is opened in the pattern H1 by the general pattern hit, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on and output, but the firing position Designation signal 2 is turned off. On the other hand, in the middle sapo, when the general electric is opened in the pattern H2 by hitting the general map, both the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are turned on and output. In this way, the output states of the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are different in the pattern H1 open and the pattern H2 open, so the test firing test equipment detects these two types of open. can be distinguished and recognized. In addition, in order to distinguish between open and cold power, only one of the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 is turned on when the power is open in pattern H1, and the power is open in pattern H2. A configuration in which only the other is turned on is also possible. In addition, both the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned off during the period during which the normal game hit does not occur even during the medium support and during the period during the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 95(B), during the electric sapo other than the middle sapo (high sapo, specific game state A and specific game state B), during the small hit, during the big hit, since it is a right-handed state, the firing position designation signal 1 and firing position designation signal 2 are both turned on and output.

For example, as shown in FIG. 96, when there is a small hit during the normal electric opening of the pattern H1, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on at the start of the normal electric opening of the pattern H1, and the firing position designation signal at the start of the small hit. 2 is turned on, and the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are turned off at the end of the small win. When there is a normal electric opening of the pattern H1 during the small winning, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 at the end of the small winning. turns off. When there is a pattern H1 open just before the end of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 2 is turned off at the end of the small win, and the pattern At the end of H1, the discharge position designation signal 1 is turned off.

When there is a small hit during the normal electric opening of the pattern H2, the firing position designating signal 1 and the firing position designating signal 2 are turned on at the start of the normal electric opening of the pattern H2, and the firing position designating signal 1 and the firing position designating signal 1 are turned on at the end of the small winning. The firing position designation signal 2 is turned off. When there is a normal electric opening of the pattern H2 during the small winning, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 at the end of the small winning. turns off. When there is a pattern H2 electrical opening just before the end of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 at the end of the electrical opening of the pattern H2. , the firing position designation signal 2 is turned off.

[Operations such as the big prize mouth and lever solenoid]
FIG. 97 shows, in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the opening operation of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39, the ON/OFF operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86, and the like. is a time chart illustrating (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error. The operation related to the opening and closing (closing) of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39 is controlled by the small hit opening process (A2612). The on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, that is, the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86 is controlled by the lever solenoid control process (A2618).

In FIG. 97(A), in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, unlike the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the upper big prize opening of the second special fluctuation prize winning device 39 is is opened once for a short period of time. This short time is, for example, the shorter one of the small hit opening time (for example, 1000 msec) and the time until the specified number of wins to the upper big winning opening.

During this short time opening of the upper big winning opening, the lever solenoid 86b is turned on for a short time (for example, 100 msec), and the specific area 86 is opened. However, since the opening of the specific area 86 (V winning opening) is very short, the game ball hardly enters the specific area 86 . Therefore, during the opening of the small hit by the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit by the V prize hardly occurs.

A V winning as a ball entering the specific area 86 is detected by the specific area switch 72 of the specific area 86 . The specific area switch 72 is activated when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on, and deactivated when processing of remaining balls is completed. Also, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test device.

The upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on in a pulse form when a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected. Immediately after that, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. In addition, when the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball, when the processing of the remaining ball is completed, irregular winning information indicating that the jackpot is due to an unexpected abnormal V winning is sent to the effect control device 300 together with the ending command. sent to. And the production control device 300 executes processing corresponding to the irregular winning information, such as notifying that it is an abnormal V winning.

In addition, the processing of the remaining balls is started from the time when the small hit is opened (when the upper grand prize opening is closed), and the time when the remaining ball counter becomes 0 or the time when the remaining ball processing time elapses, whichever is later. to end. The remaining ball counter is updated by +1 after the game ball passes through the upper big winning opening switch 39a, and is updated by -1 when the game ball (remaining ball) is detected by the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72. be. In FIG. 97A, before the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball and the remaining ball counter is already zero. Therefore, the small hit remaining ball processing (A2613) is completed when the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, and the specific area switch 72 is disabled at this point.

In this embodiment, the ending of the small hit is performed after the processing of the remaining balls. (A2613) Between the small hit ending time (for example, 2000msec), the ending of the small hit continues. The game processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set in the small winning end processing and saved in the special figure game processing number area. When a big hit is generated by winning a V prize, a fanfare effect (B2102) corresponding to the fanfare command (A5806) is executed during the fanfare time.

In FIG. 97(B), similarly to FIG. 97(A), the upper big prize opening is opened only for a short period of time, and during this short time opening of the upper big prize opening, the lever solenoid 86b is operated for a short time (for example, 100 msec), and the specific area 86 is opened. The specific area switch 72 becomes effective when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on. However, there is a residual ball error, even if the residual ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) has elapsed, the small hit residual ball processing is not completed. For this reason, according to the on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (that is, the opening pattern of the specific area 86), after turning on and off in a short time, after an interval (for example, 2900 msec), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long time. It turns off according to the cancellation of the error (end of processing of remaining balls). Here, the interval time is the sum of the small hit opening time (eg 1000 msec) and the remaining ball processing time (eg 1900 msec), but it is not limited to this. Incidentally, the ON/OFF pattern of the lever solenoid 86b is set in common for the small hit by the special figure 1 variation display game and the small hit by the special figure 2 variation display game (FIG. 98).

After that, until the residual ball error is canceled, the small hit residual ball processing continues, the lever solenoid 86b is maintained on, and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an effective state. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test device. When the residual ball error is canceled and the small hit residual ball processing is completed, the ending is a small hit as in FIG. 97(A).

When a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected and the upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on and off in pulses, a remaining ball error monitoring time (for example, 3000 msec) elapses, a remaining ball error occurs. A remaining ball error occurring flag indicating that the ball is in the middle is set to ON. After that, when the remaining ball counter reaches 0, the remaining ball error occurrence flag is turned off and the remaining ball error is canceled. For example, the measurement of the timer regarding the remaining ball error monitoring time and the ON/OFF of the remaining ball error occurrence flag are executed by providing the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1308).

FIG. 98 shows, in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the opening operation of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39, the ON/OFF operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86, and the like. is a time chart illustrating (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error.

In FIG. 98(A), in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, unlike the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (FIG. 97), the second special fluctuation winning device 39 After being opened once for a short period of time (for example, 48 msec), the big winning opening is opened multiple times over a long period of time at intervals (for example, 2860 msec). For example, multiple times of opening consists of 48 msec x 19 times of opening and 424 msec x 18 times of closing, and this long time is a total of 8544 msec or the time until the specified number of prizes are won in the upper grand prize opening. In order to make such an opening pattern of the upper big winning a prize opening, for example, in the process during the opening of the small winning, the opening and closing of the second special variable winning device 39 may be controlled by the control pointer in the same way as the general electric opening pattern.

Further, in FIG. 98(A), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on and off in a short time (for example, 100 msec) according to the above-described on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b, and then after an interval (for example, 2900 msec), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again. turns off after being on for a long time. The long time here is the shorter of 21000 msec and the time until the processing of the remaining balls is completed. In addition, in the case of a small hit by the special figure 2 variable display game, the on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (that is, the opening pattern of the specific area 86) and the opening pattern of the upper big winning opening are the opening of the upper big winning opening multiple times. It is the same until it starts, and it is interlocked substantially synchronously (the lever solenoid 86b and the upper grand winning opening solenoid 39b are also interlocked substantially synchronously).

The upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on in a pulse form when a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected. Immediately after that, or before processing the remaining balls, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. In addition, when the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball, the irregular winning information is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 because it is a big hit due to a normal V winning prize. Only the ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the end of the processing of the remaining balls.

In addition, the processing of the remaining balls starts at the end of the opening of the small hit (when the upper grand prize opening is closed), and when the remaining ball processing time elapses and the remaining ball counter becomes 0 (when the error is canceled). end at the later of In FIG. 98(A), before the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball and the remaining ball counter has already become 0. The small hit remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, and the specific area switch 72 becomes invalid at this point.

In this embodiment, after the processing of the remaining ball, it becomes the ending of the small hit, but the ending of the small hit continues during the small hitting ending time (for example, 4200 msec) set in the small hitting remaining ball processing (A2613). Incidentally, the small winning ending time in the case of the small winning by the special figure 2 variation display game is longer than that in the case of the small winning by the special figure 1 variation display game.

In FIG. 98(B), the upper big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as in FIG. 98(A). The opening pattern of the upper grand prize opening does not depend on the presence or absence of a remaining ball error. Also, in FIG. 98(B), the lever solenoid 86b operates in the same ON/OFF pattern as in FIG. 98(A) until the end of the small hit release, but due to the remaining ball error, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses. However, the lever solenoid 86b remains on for a long time of 21000 msec.

After that, until the residual ball error is canceled, the small hit residual ball processing continues, and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an effective state. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test device. When the residual ball error is canceled and the small hit residual ball processing is completed, the ending becomes a small hit as in FIG. 98(A). The occurrence and cancellation of the remaining ball error are as described with reference to FIG. 98(B).

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information. The game control means provides a first specific game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, specific game state B or specific game state A is also possible) and a second specific game state that is generated under different conditions from the first specific game state. (For example, specific game state C) can be generated. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and based on the establishment of the second start condition. A second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, The second variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the 2 variation display game is made different.

For example, the main variation display game becomes the second variation display game in the first specific game state and the first variation display game in the second specific game state, and so on. The main variation display game may be different depending on the state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, it is selected in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to clearly switch the type of variation pattern to match the type of specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect suitable for the type of the specific game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the third embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table) is made the same as in the normal game state. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the first variation display game is common to the normal game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, and the sense of incongruity in the performance is reduced. Interest can be improved. Furthermore, game control is also simplified. Also, the game rules and the like are not violated.

Also, in the third embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the second variation pattern group (for example special figure 2 variation pattern table) is made the same. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the second variation display game is common to the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the performance is incongruous, and the interest in the game can be improved. . Furthermore, game control is also simplified. Also, the game rules and the like are not violated.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, It is possible to generate a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 10 is capable of converting between an easy winning state (e.g., open state) in which game balls are easy to win and a non-easy winning state (e.g., closed state) in which it is difficult to win, and the specific game state is easier to win than the normal game state. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) that facilitates conversion to a state is provided. The game control means, when the number of executions of the variable display game under a predetermined condition (for example, a special figure low probability) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the ceiling number of times), a first specific game state without generating a special game state. (For example, specific game state B, b time saving) can be generated, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result (for example, time saving pattern) different from the special result, the second without the occurrence of the special game state Specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c short time) can be generated. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and based on the establishment of the second start condition. A second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, The second variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the 2 variation display game is made different. Variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37), in the second specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c time reduction), it is easier to convert to the easy winning state than the normal game state, but the first specific It becomes more difficult to convert to the winning easy state than the game state (for example, specific game state B, b time saving).

Main fluctuation display game (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the second specific game state, special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the first specific game state) and type of general electric support (for example, high in the first specific game state Support, medium support in the second specific game state) may differ between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, it is selected in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to clearly switch the type of variation pattern that is displayed according to the type of specific game state, and by extension, the type of general electric support. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect suitable for the type of the specific game state, and by extension, the type of the general electric support, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the game control means, with the occurrence of a special game state (for example, jackpot state), following the special game state, the third specific game state (for example, specific game state A , a time saving) can be generated. The variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37) is the first specific game state (for example, specific game state B, b time saving) and the third specific game state (for example, specific game state A, a time saving), the second It becomes easier to convert to the win easy state than the specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c short time).

Therefore, the general electric support in the second specific game state can be set to medium support, and the general electric support in the first specific game state and the third specific game state can be set to high support. And, the second specific game state is a plurality of other specific game states (the first specific game state and the third specific game state), which is the profit that the player can obtain and the shooting mode of the game ball. Both players can be in a specific game state with different characteristics, and the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game ball can be converted into an easy winning state in which it is easy to win and a non-easy winning state in which it is difficult to win. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) is provided which facilitates conversion from the normal game state to the winning easy state in the electric support state). The game control means can generate a first specific game state (for example, specific game state A or specific game state B) after the end of the special game state (for example, jackpot state), and the result of the variable display game is different from the special result. When a specific result (for example, time saving pattern) is obtained, it is possible to generate a second specific game state (for example, specific game state C) without generating a special game state. The game control means makes it easier to convert the variable winning device to the winning easy state in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state. The game control means can execute a first variable display game as a variable display game based on establishment of a first starting condition, and can execute a second variable display game based on establishment of a second starting condition. be. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, The second variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the 2 variation display game is made different.

For example, the main variation display game becomes the second variation display game in the first specific game state and the first variation display game in the second specific game state, and so on. The main variation display game may be different depending on the state. However, in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group are made different from each other, and the type of variation pattern selected in the special figure variation display game is It can be switched according to the type of the specific game state and, by extension, the frequency of the variable winning device entering the easy winning state (for example, the type of general electric support). Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect according to the type of the specific game state and, by extension, the frequency (degree) in which the variable winning device enters the easy winning state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game control means, in the first specific game state (for example specific game state A or specific game state B), the second specific game state (for example specific game state C ), the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning device 37) can be easily converted to the easy winning state, and as a variable display game, the first variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of the first start condition, The second variation display game can be executed based on the establishment of the second starting condition, and the first variation pattern group for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game is played in the normal game in the second specific game state. same as the state.

A second specific game state (for example, a specific game state C) that is more difficult to convert to an easy-to-win state than a first specific game state (for example, a specific game state A or a specific game state B) is converted into an easy-to-win state of the variable winning device. The frequency (degree) of conversion may be closer to the normal game state than the second specific game state. Therefore, in the second specific game state, if the first variation pattern group is the same as in the normal game state, the type of variation pattern selected in the first variation display game in the second specific game state is the normal game state. While reducing a sense of incongruity in performance in common with , two specific game states having different frequencies of conversion to an easy-to-win state can improve the amusement of the game. Also, the game control is simplified. In particular, in the second specific game state and the normal game state, when the hitting method (right hitting or left hitting), which is the shooting mode of the game ball, is the same, and the main variation display game is common to the first variation display game. , the first variation pattern group is the same in the second specific game state and the normal game state, and the advantage of standardizing the types of variation patterns in the first variation display game is increased (if not standardized, the sense of incongruity is greatly increased). turn into).

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 107. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

The fourth embodiment relates to the mode (display mode, light emission mode, operation mode) of the production system device according to the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (the number of difference balls + the initial value). The production-related device is a device capable of executing production, and includes, for example, the display device 41, a decoration device (such as a board decoration device 46 or a frame decoration device 18) consisting of a display device 41, a production LED, etc., and an operable movable accessory ( movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device). In addition, the control executed by the game control device 100 is the same as that of the other embodiments from the first embodiment to the third embodiment.

[Aspect of production system device according to state of safety device, etc.]
FIG. 99 is a table showing the modes of performance-related devices according to the state of the safety device. As shown in FIG. 99, depending on the state of the safety device or the value of the safety device counter (and thus the number of difference balls), the mode of the production system device changes.

As described in the first embodiment, the state of the safety device is the non-operating state (activation notice state, activation warning state, activation state normal state). Corresponding to the safety device counter value of 190000 to 194999 (90000 to 94999 difference ball number), the state of the safety device becomes an operation notice state to foretell the operation of the safety device. Corresponding to the safety device counter value of 195000 (reaching the difference number of 95000), it becomes an operation warning state that warns the operation of the safety device or an operation state (operating state) that the safety device is in operation.

It should be noted that with a safety device counter value of 195,000, the safety device will be in an active warning state during a big or small win, and will be in an active state if it is neither a big win nor a small win. Therefore, if the safety device is activated before the big win or minor win occurs, the game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) occurs immediately after, and the activation warning state does not occur.

On the other hand, an active warning condition can occur when the safety counter value reaches 195,000 during a jackpot or a minor win. For this reason, when the big win or the small win ends and the big win or the small win disappears, the safety device shifts from the operation warning state to the operating state (operating state).

In the non-activated state or activation notice state of the safety device counter value of 0 to 194999 (the number of difference balls of -100000 to 94999), the state of the gaming machine (game state) is during play or waiting for customers (waiting for customers state). In addition, with the safety device counter value of 195000 (reaching the number of difference balls of 95000), the state of the gaming machine is a small win or a big win in the safety device activation warning state, but the game is stopped in the safety device activation state. It is in a state (game disabled state, game prohibited state). It should be noted that even when the strong error 2 occurs, the same game stop state can occur.

In the game stop state, a special figure variation display game, a normal figure variation display game, a round game (a game during a big win or a small win), etc. cannot be executed. In order to do this, as in the first embodiment, when the game is stopped, detection of the game ball by the winning opening switch is disabled and the winning opening (winning) is disabled ("Y" in A2201). The solenoid is stopped ("Y" in A1602 and A1603) so as to close the winning opening, the specific area 86, the normal variable winning device 37, etc., and the shooting of the game ball from the ball shooting device is stopped (prohibited) and shooting is stopped. (“Y” in A1611 and A1612), and the collective display device 50 is turned off (“Y” in A1610 and A1612). In the game stop state, not only the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game cannot be continued, but also a new special figure variation display game and a new normal figure variation display game cannot be started. It should be noted that it is possible to have a configuration in which shooting is not stopped in the game stop state in which the safety device is activated (even in the game stop state caused by the strong error 2, shooting may not be stopped). In addition, in the game stop state, the payout command transmission process (A1307) is not stopped as in the first embodiment, and the payout of prize balls due to the winning that occurred before the game stop state is continued.

In the game stop state, a security signal is generated to be output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322), and a test signal is generated to be output to the test firing test device as ON data of the gaming machine error state signal ( A9323). It should be noted that it is possible to have a configuration in which no test signal (gaming machine error state signal) is generated in a game stop state in which the safety device is activated (a test signal is not generated even in a game stop state caused by strong error 2). may be omitted).

While the safety device is not activated, the display device 41 basically does not display the safety device-related display related to the safety device. " characters), etc., to indicate that the model is equipped with a safety device. A player who sees the specific model display 541 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function).

In the safety device actuation notice state, the display device 41 displays an actuation notice display 511 (for example, the characters "I will stop soon") as a safety device related display (or safety device actuation information display). In order to effectively display the actuation notice display 511, the display mode of the actuation notice display 511 may change according to the game state such as waiting for a customer or changing display (during execution of a special figure change display game). . In addition, at the start of the actuation notice state, since the effect control device 300 receives the actuation notice command corresponding to the actuation notice state as the safety device actuation-related command, the actuation notice display 511 is enabled on the display device 41. (Safety device system processing of B1330).

An operation notice display 511 notifies the player of the possibility of being unable to play in advance, urges the player to finish the game, and prevents the player from unintentionally receiving a disadvantage. In addition, the act warning display 511 can surprise the person who is committing fraud and prompt him to stop the fraud. The display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed according to the game state (for example, waiting for a customer, changing display), so that the notice display can be performed appropriately.

In the operation warning state of the safety device during a small hit or a big hit, the display device 41 displays an operation warning display 512 (for example, the characters "It will stop after winning") as a safety device related display. At the start of the operation warning state, the effect control device 300 receives the operation warning command corresponding to the operation warning state as the safety device operation related command, so that the display device 41 can display the operation warning display 512. (Safety device system processing of B1330).

In the operating state of the safety device (not during the small win or the big win), that is, in the game stop state, the display device 41 displays an operating indication 513 (for example, characters "stopped") as a safety device-related display. At the start of the operating state, the effect control device 300 receives the operating command corresponding to the operating state as the safety device operating related command, so the operating display 513 is enabled on the display device 41 (B1330 safety device system processing).

In addition, the effect control device 300 displays the operation notice display 511 for notifying the operation of the safety device, the operation warning display 512 for warning the operation of the safety device, and the operating display 513 for indicating that the safety device is operating. etc. (display means).

It should be noted that the display device 41 can display an error display even in a game stop state in which the safety device is activated. For example, since the payout is continued even in the game stop state, a payout error regarding the payout of the game ball (game medium) may occur, but the display device 41 can notify the payout error by displaying the error. It should be noted that the game is stopped even when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped (game disabled state, game prohibited state). In order to make the player recognize the occurrence of the error, the payout error may be notified by an error display, or the payout error may not be notified so as not to be confused with the strong error 2.

In the game stop state, unlike the non-operating state, the operation notice state, and the operation warning state, all the light emitting units (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 are turned off (all off). In addition, in the game stop state, all the light emitting units (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 may be lit (all lighting). In the game stop state, the ball lending button 27 remains active, and when the player operates the game ball to borrow the game ball, the game ball may be paid out to the upper tray 21 from the payout device.

In the game stop state, the production control device 300 that has received the operating command either turns off all the production LEDs provided in the game machine 10 such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 (all lights out) or All lights up (all lights up). However, while an error is occurring, some or all of the production LEDs may be lit in red. In addition, in the game stop state, the effect control device 300 may stop the sound output from the speaker 19 to make it silent.

In addition, in the game stop state, the production control device 300 does not execute the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), and even if there is an operation to the operation unit, the production LED and liquid crystal (display device 41 etc.) The brightness and the volume of the speaker 19 may be made non-adjustable and set to the default brightness and volume. Note that, for example, the default brightness may be zero or a predetermined value (all off or all on), and the default volume may be zero (no sound). In addition, in the hall/player setting mode processing (adjustment processing), the operation unit (the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, the volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the game machine, etc.) for the person in charge of the game hall and the player. ), various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment of the game machine 10 can be executed. In this way, even if there is an operation by the player or the like in the game stop state, since various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not executed, the player and the like can easily recognize that the game is in the stop state. Also, if the default brightness and the default sound volume are low, power can be saved when the game is stopped.

In another configuration, in the game stop state, the effect control device 300 does not accept (ignores) the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation unit even if the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) is executed. or disabled), and even if there is an operation on the operation unit by the person in charge of the game arcade or the player, the default brightness and volume may be set. In the case of this configuration, the operation signal corresponding to the first operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b) that can be operated by the player is not accepted (ignored or disabled). On the other hand, an operation signal corresponding to the second operation unit (volume control switch 335) that can be operated by a person in charge of the hall, such as a person in charge of the game hall or an attendant may be received. Then, when there is an operation on the first operation section by the player, the predetermined brightness and volume are set, and when there is an operation on the second operation section by a hall official, the second operation section is performed. The volume adjustment and brightness adjustment of the gaming machine 10 may be executed according to the operation of . The second operation unit (volume control switch 335) is provided on the performance control device 300 on the back of the gaming machine, and can be operated by hall personnel but not by players.

The effect control device 300, when the game stop state starts during the operation of the movable accessory (movable member, electric accessory, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) (when the safety device is activated), If the movable accessory is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the movable accessory may be moved from the operating position back to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being maintained at the operating position in the game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstanding such as that the movable member is out of order. While the movable accessory (movable member) is returning from the operating position to the initial position, the performance LED of the movable accessory is in the lighted state (operating state) and is in the off state (initial state). may As described above, when the game is stopped, all the performance LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 are turned off (all turned off) or turned on (all turned on), so that the movable accessory returns to the initial position. After that, the performance LED of the movable accessory is turned off or turned on in accordance with the other LEDs.

Conversely, the effect control device 300, when the game stop state starts during the operation of the movable accessory (movable member, electric accessory, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) (when the safety device is activated ), if the movable accessory is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the movable accessory may be maintained at the operating position without returning from the operating position to the initial position. In this case, the motion position where the movable accessory is stopped and maintained is the motion position at the start of the game stop state, another motion position where the movable accessory has slightly moved from the start of the game stop state due to a time lag, etc., or , another appropriate operating position different from the operating position at the start of the game stop state. As described above, when the game is stopped, all the performance LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 are turned off (all turned off) or turned on (all turned on), so that the movable accessory is positioned at the operating position. While it is still stopped, the performance LED of the movable accessory may be turned off or turned on in accordance with the other LEDs.

In this way, after the start of the game stop state (after the safety device is activated), if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position and stops at the predetermined operating position, the game machine 10 is in a normal state (game It is possible to emphasize to the player that the player is not in a state where they can play the game. For example, if the board production device 44 (upper production unit 40c, etc.) as a movable accessory is in an unnatural position such as the front side (front) of the display screen of the display device 41, and the game is stopped, the player feels uncomfortable. and easily recognize that the game machine 10 is not in a normal state.

When the movable accessory is the board effect device 44 provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the initial position of the movable accessory is, for example, the front side (front) of the display device 41. and the operating position of the movable accessory is, for example, a position where the movable accessory overlaps the display device 41 on the front side of the display device 41 (the upper effect unit 40c in FIG. 103 (H3). position reference). In addition, the initial position in this case is a position where the movable accessory is difficult to see from the front side (player side) in the storage space on the back side (rear side) of the center case 40 (a part of the movable accessory is placed in the center case 40). It may be a position where it is covered). Further, when the movable accessory is a frame production device (for example, a decoration device 18a such as a top unit) provided in the glass frame 15 (or the opening/closing frame), the initial position of the movable accessory is, for example, the glass frame 15 ( (or the opening/closing frame) is a position where the movable accessory is difficult to see from the front side in the storage space inside (a position where the movable accessory is retracted into the glass frame 15 and a part of the movable accessory is covered with the glass frame 15). The operating position of is, for example, a position where the movable accessory protrudes forward, upward, or obliquely from the initial position.

It should be noted that even if a strong error 2 occurs, the game stop state occurs in the same way as when the safety device is activated. If the object is located at an operating position other than the initial position, the effect control device 300 may move the movable accessory from the operating position to the initial position, or may maintain the movable accessory at the operating position without returning it to the initial position. may By returning the movable accessory to the initial position, it is possible to prevent unnecessary misunderstandings such as malfunction of the movable member. If the movable accessory is not returned to the initial position, it is unnatural, and the player can easily recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 10. - 特許庁

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as a special game processing timer, a character game processing timer, and a general game processing timer are stopped, but the collective display device 50 is not turned off. The display when the game is stopped may be continued. Further, if the collective display device 50 is performing variable display at the start of the game stop state, the collective display device 50 may be turned off after the variable display is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent sudden termination of the variable display on the batch display device 50 . Also, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue the display.

It should be noted that when the gaming machine 10 is turned off (turned off) and then turned on (turned on) again, the safety device information initialization process initializes the safety device counter area, the safety device operation information area, etc. (A1104-A1106), Since safety device activation information such as safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3) is deleted, the safety device related display ( The operation notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, the operation display 513, etc.) may be erased and not displayed. When the game machine 10 is powered off (turned off) while the safety device is in operation and then turned on (turned on) again with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the safety device in-operation flag area is cleared to 0 (A1045). The game machine 10 returns from the game stop state to the state where the game can be played.

[Example 1 of screen transition]
FIGS. 100A and 100B are examples (example 1) of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the fourth embodiment.

In (a), after the power is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is in a customer waiting state (customer waiting state), and the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting screen. Since the game has not started, the safety device counter value is the initial value (100,000). After that, a player seated on a chair in front of the game machine 10 rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball, and the game ball enters the starting prize opening 36, and so on. A variable display game is executed.

After that, (a) shows a situation in which the special figure variation display game has been executed twice after the power is turned on. The safety device counter value has decreased from the initial value (100,000) to 99,920. Since the total number of prize balls does not increase significantly until a big hit occurs, the number of difference balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) tends to decrease by the number of discharged balls, and the safety device counter value (difference number of balls + initial value) also tends to decrease. When the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the safety device counter value or the difference ball number (safety device counter value-initial value) is displayed. It may be displayed on the display screen of the device 41 .

Since the game is in the normal game state after the power is turned on, the mode display 679 displays "A mode" corresponding to the normal mode as the effect mode. The variation count display 677 indicates the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the power is turned on or after the end of the big hit. shown in In addition, in the case of a model that can generate a probability variation state, the variation number display 677 is to make it easier to understand that the number of times is approaching the ceiling, except for the number of times in the probability variation state. It may indicate the number of executions of the display game. In addition, the variable count display 677 may indicate the remaining number of games up to the ceiling (number of times of ceiling - number of times of execution).

The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (during variation), and the second predetermined image 676 is that the special figure 2 variation display game is being stopped. The symbol "x" indicates that A fourth symbol variation may be performed as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) by blinking the symbol "○".

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a, a right pattern 611b, and a middle pattern 611c can be variably displayed as decorative special patterns (large patterns). The left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are displayed in the left fluctuation display area 610A, the right fluctuation display area 610B, and the center fluctuation display area 610C in the fluctuation display area 610, respectively. In this embodiment, the left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

Four pending displays 682a (first pending display) are displayed in the first pending display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) before execution of the variable display game as the first pending display. be done. The pending display 682a has a display mode imitating playing cards. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, the variable pending display 682b showing the variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed (the starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) was turned over. It is displayed in a display mode imitating playing cards. Note that the pedestal may indicate the reserved digestion region 640 . In addition, nothing is displayed here in the second suspension display portion 630b that displays the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the second retention display (second start memory display). do not have.

In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the numbers "4" and special figure 2 indicating the special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) respectively The number "0" indicating the number of reservations (special figure 2 start memory number) is displayed.

After (b), many big hits occur, and in (c), the safety device counter value becomes 189993 (number of difference balls = 89993), and the notice start value 190000 (number of difference balls = 90000), but is approaching the advance notice start value of 190000.

In (c), after hitting the jackpot or reaching the ceiling, the game is in a specific game state (time-saving state), and the mode display 679 displays "flower mode" corresponding to the time-saving mode as the production mode. The variation number display 677 indicates that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 73, as in "73G". In addition, a right hitting instruction display 502 for instructing the player to hit right is displayed corresponding to the time saving mode.

In the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "0" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "1" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. . The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. It is "○".

One pending display 683a (second pending display) is displayed in the second pending display portion 630b that displays the second starting memory as the second pending display. Suspension display 683a has a display mode imitating a flower. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, the variable pending display 683b indicating the variable pending related to the special figure 2 variable display game being executed (starting memory that was the right to execute this special figure variable display game) It is displayed in a simulated display mode. Note that the pedestal may indicate the reserved digestion region 640 . Here, nothing is displayed in the first suspension display portion 630a that displays the first starting memory before execution of the variable display game as the first suspension display.

Next, in (d), by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) by hitting to the right, the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, respectively, A number "0" indicating the number of special figures 1 reserved and a number "4" indicating the number of special figures 2 reserved are displayed. Four pending displays 683a (second pending displays) are displayed in the second pending display portion 630b.

In (d), some prize balls are obtained by winning the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the safety device counter value becomes 190009, which is larger than the notice start value 190000 at which the operation notice state starts (safety device counter value ≧190000). Then, as a safety-device-related display, an activation notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") is displayed to foretell the activation of the safety device. Since the operation notice display 511 can be expressed in a small (short) display area, it may be scrolled across the screen instead of being displayed all at once. In this activation notice state, the activation of the safety device may be notified not only by the activation notice display 511, but also by the sound from the speaker or the lighting of the performance LED in a predetermined mode. .

An operation notice display 511 gives an advance notice of the operation of the safety device, informs the player in advance that there is a possibility of the game being stopped, urges the player to end the game, and prevents the player from unintentionally You can prevent being disadvantaged. In addition, the activation of the safety device can be announced to surprise the person who is committing fraud and encourage him/her to stop the fraud.

The activation notice display 511 is displayed in a small size so as not to overlap other displays or image objects. This makes it easier to see other displays and image objects. Here, the other displays and image objects include decorative special patterns (large pattern in variable display area 610, small pattern in variable display area 615), first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, reserved displays 682a, 682b, 683a, 683b, pending number display (numbers of special figure 1 pending number display part 650 and special figure 2 pending number display part 660), mode display 679, change number display 677, right hitting instruction display 502, character (not shown) and so on.

It should be noted that even if the operation notice display 511 is displayed small so as not to interfere with other displays, it may be displayed by shaking or moved by scrolling across the display screen so as to attract attention to some extent. Further, the actuation notice display 511 may be displayed in the vicinity of (eg, to the left of) the right-handed instruction display 502 facing (adjacent to) the right-handed instruction display 502 so as to attract attention to some extent. When the activation notice display 511 is displayed in a large size, it may be overlapped with other displays or other image objects. to display.

After that, in (e), the player stops operating the operating handle 24 to take a rest, etc., and the shooting of the game ball is finished. Then, the digestion of the second starting memory progresses, the reservation display 683a of the second reservation display unit 630b disappears, and the special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 becomes "0". Only the change pending display 683b is displayed.

The safety device counter value is 190055, which is greater than the advance notice start value 190000 at which the operation advance notice state starts, and the display of the operation advance notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") continues as the safety device-related display. The variation count display 677 displays "77G" as the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit.

Subsequently, in (F), the special figure 2 variable display game of (E) is finished, and the decoration stop pattern is displayed as "3, 7, 8" in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615. The pending change display 683b disappears, and the second predetermined image 676 becomes "x". The operation notice display 511 does not overlap with the decoration special pattern (here, the decoration stop pattern). The safety device counter value remains 190,055.

Subsequently, in (g), the gaming machine 10 is in a customer waiting state (customer waiting state), and the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting screen. While waiting for the customer, the safety counter value is maintained at 190055. As described above, the display mode of the activation notice display 511 ("It will be over soon") may change according to the game state, and the display mode of the activation notice display 511 is during the waiting for customers, during the variable display (special figure fluctuation display during game execution). As a result, the activation notice display 511 can be displayed appropriately and effectively. In an activation notice state in which it is expected that the safety device will be activated immediately and the game will be stopped, the operation notice display 511 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner as shown in (g) while the customer is waiting, thereby attracting new players. (Customers) can be prevented from using the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加In order to make the operation notice display 511 more conspicuous, it may be operated by shaking or moving while waiting for customers. Also, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed by scrolling across the screen so as to stand out.

Details of the customer waiting screen will be described later with reference to FIG. By displaying the operation notice display 511, the large operation notice display 511 is prevented from being hidden by other displays or other image objects on the customer waiting screen and becoming difficult to see.

After that, in (h), the player has just finished the rest and restarted the game. By winning a prize to the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, two second start memories (special figure 2 start memories) are generated, and a change pending display 683b and a pending display 683a are displayed. The special figure 2 reservation number of the special figure 2 reservation number display unit 660 becomes "1". Then, the special figure 2 variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the second predetermined image 676 is "O". The change number display 677 is displayed as "78G". The safety device counter value has started to change and is now 190057. After the end of the customer waiting state, the operation notice display 511 ("It will be closed soon") returns to the same display mode as during the variable display before the start of the customer waiting state, and is displayed in a smaller size.

After (h), many big hits occur without going through the normal mode due to continuous chan etc., and in (v), the safety device counter value becomes 194500 (number of difference balls = 94500), and the safety device can start operating. is less than the counter reference value of 195000, but is approaching the counter reference value of 195000.

In addition, when the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 determines that the safety device counter value is greater than the notice start value 190000. It can be recognized that a predetermined value of 194,500, which is slightly smaller than the counter reference value of 195,000, is reached. When the safety device counter value is this predetermined value of 194500, the effect control device 300 may notify by blinking the activation notice display 511 that the activation of the safety device is near.

In (K), the variable pending display 683b and four pending display 683a are displayed, and the special figure 2 pending number of the special figure 2 pending number display unit 660 becomes "4". The change number display 677 is displayed as "115G". Here, in order to notify that the second starting memory is wasted due to the game stop due to the operation of the safety device, the effect control device 300 blinks part or all of the variable suspension display 683b and the four suspension display 683a. you can

In addition, after (vii), the safety device counter value of 194500 or more (predetermined value of 94500 or more) is a situation where the game is about to stop due to the operation of the safety device, so that the player does not have unnecessary expectations. The control device 300 may prohibit and not execute the pending change notice that changes the display mode (color or shape) of the pending displays 682a, 683a, etc. according to the degree of expectation of the big hit. On the other hand, even after (vi), it is not necessary to prohibit the change in the display mode of the pending display during fluctuation 682b, 683b because the fluctuation display game currently being executed suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the small hit or the big hit will be the result. . In addition, with a safety device counter value of a predetermined value of 194500 or more, the effect control device 300 may prohibit pre-reading effects other than the pending change notice (pre-reading notice effects such as continuous notice effects and pre-reading zone effects), or Only part of the look-ahead effect (for example, pending change notice) may be prohibited. If only the pending change notice is prohibited as part of the look-ahead effect, the effect can be ensured while the player does not directly expect the pending displays 682a and 683a themselves. It should be noted that, in the operation notice state after (d), a configuration is also possible in which the pending change notice and the look-ahead effect are prohibited and not executed.

In addition, once the safety device counter value reaches a predetermined value of 194500 (after the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined value of 94500), all or part of the look-ahead effect is prohibited unless the power is turned off and then turned on again. should not be run. Alternatively, if the safety device counter value once reaches a predetermined value of 194500 and then falls below a predetermined value of 194500 (or another smaller value of 194000), all or part of the lookahead effect is prohibited. can be executed again without

In addition, the game control device 100, regardless of the safety device counter value (number of difference balls), before the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is executed, the result of the special figure variation display game can be determined in advance. Drawing reservation information determination processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed, and the determination result can be transmitted to the effect control device 300 including in the prefetching stop symbol command and the prefetching variation pattern command. Then, the performance control device 300 that receives the look-ahead stop symbol command or the look-ahead variation pattern command may execute the look-ahead performance (look-ahead notice performance) regardless of the safety device counter value (the number of difference balls), unlike the above. As a result, even when the safety device counter value (the number of difference balls) reaches a predetermined value of 194500 (predetermined value of the difference number of 94500) near the occurrence of a game impossible state, the look-ahead effect can be executed and the interest of the game is improved. can.

In addition, the activation notice display 511 displayed from (d) to (ke) indicates that when the gaming machine 10 is powered off (turned off) and turned on (turned on) again before the safety device is activated, the safety device information is displayed. Since the safety device activation information area is initialized by the initialization processing and the safety device activation notice information (value 1) is erased, it is no longer displayed.

After that, in (ko), the safety device counter value is the counter reference value 195000 (the number of difference balls = the difference ball reference value 95000), but since it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the safety device is in the operating state (operating state ), and the game machine 10 immediately enters a game stop state. Since the game has stopped (game disabled state, game prohibited state), an operating display 513 (“pause”) is displayed as a safety device-related display. The operating display 513 is larger in size than the operating notice display 511 and stands out, and strongly suggests that the safety device is operating (game is stopped) so that the player does not use the gaming machine 10 . The active indication 513 (“Stopping”) may be flashed, wiggled, or moved to make it stand out, such as by an animated display.

The active display 513 notifies that a game (particularly a new game) is in a stopped state, thereby preventing a player (customer) from using the gaming machine 10 and preventing a person who is cheating. You can stop cheating if you do.

In addition, when the game is stopped, if the special figure variation display game is being executed (during variation display) in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615, whether the special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped. Alternatively, the special figure variation display game being executed in the layer on the back side (behind the background, the backmost side) may be continued in a form that cannot be visually recognized.

Next, in (S), immediately after (J), the display device 41 displays a payout error display for reporting a payout error regarding the payout of game balls. In addition, it is assumed that the payout of prize balls due to the winning that occurred before the game stopped state continues during or after the game stopped state, and a payout error related to this payout occurs. As payout errors, there are a shot ball running out error corresponding to the shortage of game balls before payout and an overflow error corresponding to the lower tray 23 becoming full. As mentioned above, these payout errors are included in weak errors.

In (S), as a payout error display, a ball out error display 520 (for example, the characters "ball out error") that informs a shot ball out error, and an overflow error display 522 that informs an overflow error (for example, "pull out the ball Please” is displayed. As each payout error is cleared, each corresponding payout error indication may be cleared. In this way, even when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, a payout error can be notified, so that the player, hall personnel, etc. are not disadvantaged or inconvenienced. In addition, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the display device 41, and the like work together to constitute a reporting means capable of reporting an error.

In addition, even if an error or fraud other than a payout error (frame opening error, magnet fraud, etc.) occurs when the game is stopped or afterward, it will cause disadvantages or inconveniences to players and hall personnel. An error display may be provided to inform the user of this error or illegality. Also, even if an error (especially a payout error) or fraud occurs, if the safety device counter value is the counter reference value of 195000, the safety device can be activated and the game stop state can occur.

In this embodiment, the payout error indications such as the out-of-ball error indication 520 and the overflow error indication 522 are displayed on the display device 41 together with the operating indication 513 (“stopped”) so as not to overlap. The in-operation display 513 may be conspicuously displayed in a layer (frontmost layer) on the front side of the payout error display so as to be superimposed on the payout error display, or conversely, the payout error display may be conspicuously displayed in the in-operation display 513. It may be displayed on a layer on the front side (foremost layer) and overlapped with the display 513 during operation. Also, until the payout error is resolved, only the payout error display may be displayed and the operating display 513 may not be displayed.

An error display such as a dispensing error can be displayed on the display device 41 together with an operation advance notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") even in the operation advance notice state. It can be displayed on the display device 41 together with 512 ("It will stop after winning"). The error display may be conspicuously displayed in a layer on the front side of the activation notice display 511 and the activation warning display 512 and superimposed thereon.

In the game stop state, each error (especially each payout error) is notified by outputting a sound from the speaker 19 in addition to the error display, or by causing the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 to emit a specific LED for effect. You may alert|report by making it light-emit in a mode. For example, in this particular light emission mode, some or all of the performance LEDs may emit red light, and only the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 (frame LEDs) may emit light, or the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 ( Only the LED of the game board 30 may emit light, or both the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 may emit light.

For example, in response to a shot ball running out error and an overflow error, the error display (ball running out error display 520 and overflow error display 522) is output from the speaker 19 along with a sound indicating the content of the error ("Ball out", "Ball out", "Ball out"). please”).

Each error (especially each payout error) is the same error in both the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state (playing or waiting for customers, non-operating state, operation notice state, operation warning state) It may be notified in the same notification mode (notification method) so that it can be recognized, or so that the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state can be distinguished and recognized, or it is suitable for each state. You may alert|report by a different alerting|reporting aspect (reporting method). In addition, unlike the above, an error such as a payout error may be notified only by the sound from the speaker 19 and/or the light emission of the performance LED without displaying the error on the display device 41 .

In the case of notifying in different notification modes, for example, when the game is stopped, the shot ball running out error is notified by the ball running out error display 520 of the display device 41 and the voice output of the speaker 19, and in a state other than the game stopping state, The error may be notified by the out-of-ball error display 520 and the light emission of the performance LED. In addition, for example, in consideration of the need to urgently deal with an overflow error, an overflow error display 522 and a voice output are commonly used in both the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, but these two states The volume of the audio output or the pitch of the sound may be varied between. Further, when the notification is given in a different notification mode, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 may emit light in the game stopped state, and the LED of the board decoration device 46 may emit light in the state other than the game stopped state.

The screen transition has been described above, but when the safety device counter value reaches 190,000 (the number of difference balls is 90,000) and the safety device activation notice state is reached, the safety device counter value decreases (the number of difference balls is when the number is decreasing), the display of the operation notice display 511 ("It will be terminated soon") may be erased and hidden. For example, when the safety device counter value reaches 190000 and then decreases to 189000, the activation notice display 511 may be hidden.

For example, in this case, if the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the difference ball number is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control device 300 determines the safety device counter value of 189000 to hide the operation notice display 511. Alternatively, in this case, a safety device operation-related command corresponding to the non-operating state is newly provided, and the safety device counter value of 189000 is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 is operated. The notice display 511 may be hidden. The safety device activation commands sent in the above-mentioned safety device related processing include an activation notice command corresponding to the activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, and an operating command corresponding to the activation state. However, the safety device operation related command (non-operating command) corresponding to the non-operating state is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the safety device related processing.

[Example 2 of screen transition]
FIG. 101 is another example (example 2) of the screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order regarding the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 100A and 100B, after (h), the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195000 at (co) without a small win or a big win, and the safety device is immediately activated and the game is stopped. became. However, in Example 2, after (h), a small win or a big win occurs, the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195000 during the small win or the big win, and an operation warning state is entered, ending the small win state or the big win state. Later (after the end of the operation warning state), the game is stopped.

In (K 1), after (H), the special figure variation display game (here, special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a small hit result or a big win result, and the small winning pattern or the big winning pattern is a variable display area as the decoration stop pattern. 610 and variable display area 615 . Here, an example in which the big hit symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed is shown. The safety device counter value is 194278, which is greater than the advance notice start value 190000 at which the operation advance notice state starts, and an operation advance notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") is displayed as a safety device-related display. The activation notice display 511 is displayed in a small size so as not to overlap with other displays or other image objects, as in (d) and (f) of FIG. 100A.

The pending change display 682b disappears, and the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are "x". A mode display 679 displays "A mode" corresponding to the normal mode as the production mode. The change number display 677 is displayed as "170G". "3" and "0" are displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660, respectively. Three pending displays 682a are displayed in the first pending display portion 630a, and nothing is displayed in the second pending display portion 630b.

Next, in (K2), a small win or big win round game (a game during a big win or a small win) is executed in the first round. In the case of a small winning round game, a V winning occurs here, and a big winning state due to the V winning starts from the next second round. On the display screen, a round effect is being executed as a moving image or the like. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 502 is displayed to instruct right-handed hitting in response to the opening of the big winning hole. Since the big prize opening is open, a large number of prize balls (the number of winning balls and the number of safe balls) can be obtained by winning the prize in the big prize opening. Then, the safety device counter value increases from (1) to 194318, and the display of the activation notice display 511 ("Stopping soon") continues as the safety device-related display. The activation notice display 511 may or may not overlap the round effect so as not to be an obstacle.

In addition, in (K2), the display mode of the operation notice display 511 is the progress or production of the game from the normal game (normal game state, normal mode) of (K1) to the round game (special game state, round effect) may vary with the progress of (1). For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed smaller than (1), displayed in an inconspicuous color, or hidden (not displayed in the display mode of the activation notice display 511) so as not to interfere with the round effect. may include). As a result, the operation notice display 511 can be appropriately displayed in correspondence with the progress of the game or the progress of the performance. In particular, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed according to the progress of the game or the progress of the performance so as not to interfere with the performance on the display device 41, thereby improving the interest of the game.

After that, in (K3), the round effect is executed in the third round. Here, the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value of 195000, but since the jackpot is in progress, the safety device has not yet been activated, and the operation warning state is entered and the operation warning display 512 (“Stops after winning”). is displayed on the display device 41 . The activation warning display 512 is larger in size than the activation notice display 511 and more conspicuous, and suggests the possibility of activation of the safety device (occurrence of the game stop state) more strongly than the activation notice state. The actuation warning indicator 512 may or may not overlap the round presentation so as to be unobtrusive.

After that, in (K4), the safety device counter value remains at the counter reference value of 195000, but the big hit ending effect is executed, and the operation warning display 512 is displayed in the same manner as in (K3). The actuation warning display 512 may or may not overlap the ending effect so as not to get in the way. In addition, the ending effect in the activation warning state is different from the ending effect in states other than the activation warning state (unactivated state, activation notice state), because it is just before the activation of the safety device, the activation of the safety device (stop) It may be a dedicated ending production that suggests. In addition, regarding (K4), the same applies to the case where the small winning ending effect is executed in the operation warning state.

In addition, in (K4), the display mode of the operation warning display 512 changes according to the progress of the game or the progress of the production from the round game (round effect) to the ending (ending effect) in (K3), (Q3) may be different. For example, the activation warning display 512 may be displayed in a smaller size than (3), displayed in an inconspicuous color, or hidden (not displayed in the display mode of the activation warning display 512) so as not to interfere with the ending effect. may include). As a result, the operation warning display 512 can be appropriately displayed in correspondence with the progress of the game or the progress of the performance. In particular, the display mode of the operation warning display 512 can be changed according to the progress of the game or the progress of the performance so as not to interfere with the performance on the display device 41, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In this way, the operation warning display 512 informs the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of the small win or the big win, and warns the player of the disadvantage such as the stopping of consecutive wins. can be done. In addition, the operation warning display 512 can surprise a person who is committing fraud and encourage him/her to stop the fraud.

Subsequently, in (C1), the ending time elapses and the ending of the big win ends, that is, the state of the big win ends, the safety device is activated and the game is stopped (the same applies to the ending of the small win). In the game stop state, the effect control device 300 displays an operating indication 513 (“pausing”) on the display screen in response to receiving the operating command. The operating display 513 is larger in size than the operating notice display 511 and the operating warning display 512 and stands out, and indicates that the safety device is operating (game is stopped) so that the player does not use the gaming machine 10. strongly suggest.

In (C1), a two-dimensional code 524 such as a QR code (registered trademark) is displayed on the display screen. Furthermore, a reading recommendation display 525 (reading promotion display) that recommends (promotes) the player to read the two-dimensional code 524 with a camera-equipped information terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone is a character display (for example, "Continue is a smartphone "Enjoy with" and "Read with camera") are also displayed on the display screen. By reading and inputting the two-dimensional code 524 with the camera of an information terminal equipped with a camera, this information terminal can access a server outside the game hall and store the game results in the server. Linked services (linked services) such as so-called smartphone linked services (mobile linked services) can be used.

In addition, when the game is stopped due to the operation (stop) of the safety device, the effect control device 300 responds to the reception of the operating command or the special ending effect (K4), The performance points may be increased (added) more than the amount of increase obtained in normal performance (B0012). As a result, the player can relieve the discomfort caused by the game stoppage. Since the information of the large effect point is encoded and embedded in the two-dimensional code 524, it is stored in an external server. Note that the information of the effect point indirectly becomes stop information indicating the stop, but the stop information itself may be encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code 524 . A player can always access an external server using an information terminal or the like and display information on performance points and stop information on the information terminal. As a result, the player can show the information of the large performance points and the stop information to others, and can boast about it, thereby obtaining a sense of satisfaction.

A one-dimensional code such as a bar code may be used instead of the two-dimensional code 524 . Also, the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed in the same way in (ko) of FIG. 100B.

Next, in (sa), similarly to (sa) in FIG. 100B, as error displays, the out-of-ball error display 520 and the overflow error display 522 are performed. Note that the two-dimensional code 524 may be erased from the display screen after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, two minutes).

The order of (1) and (3) may be reversed so that the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed on the display screen after displaying the error. Alternatively, in (C1), both the error display and the two-dimensional code 524 may be displayed on the display screen. In this case, the error display may be conspicuously displayed on the front side layer (foremost layer) than the operating display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524 so as to overlap the operating display 513 and the two-dimensional code 524 . When the error display is superimposed on the two-dimensional code 524 in a layer (foremost layer) on the front side of the two-dimensional code 524, dealing with the error is more important than reading the two-dimensional code 524. This can be notified by making the two-dimensional code 524 unreadable. In addition, the effect control device 300 may stop or interrupt the update (update of the timer value) of the display timer that measures the predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) for displaying the two-dimensional code 524 during the error display. If the update of the display timer is interrupted, when the error is eliminated, the display timer restarts the measurement of the predetermined time by restarting the update from the timer value at the time of interruption, or The predetermined time may be measured again by starting updating the timer value from the initial value.

As described above, with regard to FIG. 101, the activation notice display 511 (“I will stop soon”), the activation warning display 512 (“I will stop after winning”), and the operating display 513 (“Stopping”) are displayed in this order. In addition, since the sentence itself to be displayed in characters is also different, the display mode is different. It should be noted that the display mode may include the sentence itself to be displayed in characters. However, as safety device-related displays, the display modes of the operation notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operating display 513 may be made common even if they are totally different. For example, the operation notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operation display 513 have a common character string “stop”, are displayed in the same font (typeface), and have at least a partial display mode in common (partially may be displayed in the same color and character size). As a result, the various safety device-related displays have commonalities and are aligned to some extent, making it easier to give the impression that they are commonly related to safety devices (complete function, stopping function), It is possible to prevent misidentification with other types of displays other than device-related displays. The operation notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operation display 513 are different in font (typeface), character size, and color from the error display so as not to be misidentified as an error display (out-of-ball error display 520 or overflow error display 522). , and the error display and the display mode may be different so as not to have commonality.

[Example of operation notice display that differs depending on game status]
FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating activation notice displays 511a to 511d that differ depending on the game state in relation to the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 100A and 100B, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 ("It will be over soon") is different between the game state (g) waiting for customers and the variable display such as (o) (g). . However, in FIG. 102, between (A) normal game state, (B) time saving state, (C) variable probability state, and (D) special game state, operation notice display 511a- The display mode is different as shown in 511d. In FIGS. 102A to 102D, the safety device counter value is a value (for example, 190055) that is larger than the notice start value 190000 at which the actuation notice state starts and smaller than the counter reference value 195000. FIG.

FIG. 102(A) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the normal game state (normal mode). 170G" are the same as (a) in FIG. 100A. In the normal game state, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls and the number of safe balls) is not so large, so the possibility of the game being stopped due to the activation of the safety device is low. Therefore, the activation notice display 511a in the normal game state is displayed small, for example, at the left end of the display screen so as not to interfere with other displays such as variable display. When the left-handed instruction display 503 instructing the player to hit left-handed is displayed, the activation notice display 511a is placed in the vicinity of the left-handed instruction display 503 (such as below) in order to increase the opportunity for the player to pay attention to the left-handed instruction display 503. It may be displayed facing (adjacent to) the left-handed hitting instruction display 503 .

FIG. 102(B) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the time-saving state (time-saving mode), which is the same as (h) of FIG. 100B. In the time-saving state, it is easier to obtain prize balls than in the normal game state due to the general electric support, and there is a high possibility that the number of safe balls will increase significantly as a big hit than in the normal game state, and the safety device can be activated. highly sexual. Therefore, the operation notice display 511b in the time saving state is displayed so as to be larger and conspicuous than the operation notice display 511a in the normal game state, and strongly informs the possibility of the safety device being operated.

FIG. 102 (C) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the variable probability state (variable probability mode) when the variable probability state (variable probability mode) exists, but the operation notice display 511c, the mode display 679, and the number of fluctuations Except for display 677, it is the same as (h) of FIG. 100B. In the probability variable state, there is a higher possibility that the number of safe balls will increase significantly as a result of a big hit than in the time-saving state, and that the safety device will be activated. For this reason, the variable probability state actuation notice display 511c is displayed more prominently than the time saving state actuation notice display 511b, and strongly informs the possibility that the safety device will operate.

FIG. 102(D) shows the display screen of the display device 41 in the special game state (during the big win or during the small win), and the round effect is being executed on the display screen in the same manner as in FIG. 101(K2). . In the special game state, the number of safe balls is greatly increased by the opening of the big winning hole, so the possibility of the safety device being activated is higher than in the variable probability state. Therefore, the special game state actuation notice display 511d is displayed more prominently than the probability variable state actuation notice display 511c, and strongly informs the possibility of the safety device being operated. The activation notice display 511d may be displayed in the vicinity (eg, left side) of the right-handed instruction display 502 so as to face (adjacent to) the right-handed instruction display 502 in order to increase the opportunity for the player to pay attention to it.

As described above, in FIG. 102, the sizes of the operation notice displays 511a to 511d are increased in order of the normal game state, the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the special game state, making them more conspicuous. As another example, the colors and fonts of the operation notice displays 511a to 511d may differ according to the game state so that they stand out in the order of the normal game state, the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the special game state. In this manner, the activation notice displays 511a to 511d can effectively announce the activation of the safety device.

[Example of operation notice display before and after reach]
FIG. 103 is a diagram exemplifying the activation notice display 511 before and after the reach during the variable display regarding the fourth embodiment.

(H1) is the same as (H) in FIG. 100B, but shows before the decorative special symbol reaches the reach state, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed from the lower center to the lower left end of the display screen.

Next, in (H2), the ready-to-win state starts, the left pattern 611a temporarily stops (for example, shaking fluctuation) in the left fluctuation display area 610A, and the right pattern 611b temporarily stops (for example, fluctuation) in the right fluctuation display area 610B. shaking). As the ready-to-win effect, the characters “reach” may be displayed on the display screen, or the voice “reach” may be generated from the speaker 19 . The operation notice display 511 is set so as not to interfere with the temporarily stopped left pattern 611a and right pattern 611b, or so as not to interfere with the ready-to-win effect that will be displayed large in the center of the display screen in the future. It is displayed in a manner different from that before reach in 1), for example, it is moved to the left end of the display screen and displayed in a smaller size and vertically written than before reach. At this stage, a movie (moving image) is not displayed and the upper effect unit 40c is not in the SP reach state where the upper effect unit 40c moves downward, so the operation notice display 511 may be in the same display mode as (H1).

Next, in (h3), the state of N reach of (h2) develops into SP reach. Here, the left design 611a and the right design 611b are reduced and moved to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively. As an SP reach effect, a large movie (moving image) is displayed in the center of the display screen. Also, as the SP reach effect, the upper effect unit 40c as a movable accessory moves downward from the initial position and is arranged at the operation position in front of the display screen. Here, the operation notice display 511 is already set at the stage of (H2) in a manner different from that before the reach of (H1) so as not to interfere with the movie in the center of the display screen or the upper effect unit 40c at the operating position. It is displayed, for example, it is moved to the left end of the display screen and displayed in vertical writing smaller than before reach. In (H2), the operation advance notice display 511 may be hidden (non-display may be included in the display mode of the operation advance notice display 511).

It should be noted that the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a manner different from that before the reach for the first time at the stage of the SP reach of (h3). Further, the operation notice display 511 may change its display mode from before the SP reach of (H2) in accordance with the SP reach performance. For example, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a smaller size than in (H2) or displayed in an inconspicuous color so as not to interfere with the SP reach effect. In addition, when the SP ready-to-win production appears in (H3), the activation notice display 511 may be hidden because it interferes with the SP ready-to-win production (non-display may be included in the display mode of the activation notice display 511). .

As described above, as shown in FIG. 103, the display mode of the activation notice display 511 may change and differ according to the progress of the game (here, the variable display game) or the progress of the effect. As a result, the operation notice display 511 can be appropriately displayed in correspondence with the progress of the game or the progress of the performance. In particular, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed according to the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the performance on the display device 41, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Example of operation notice display while waiting for customers]
FIG. 104 is a screen transition diagram illustrating an operation notice display 511 during customer waiting in relation to the fourth embodiment. The effect control device 300 changes the customer waiting screen of the display device 41 during customer waiting through the customer waiting demonstration editing process (B0015), the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), etc., to the (key 1) stop screen → ( G2) Player setting screen→(G3) Customer waiting demo movie screen→(G4) Model name display screen→(G5) Attention display screen→(G1) Stop screen→(G2) Player The display may be cyclically switched in the order of setting screen→(K3) customer waiting demo movie screen. As the customer waiting screen, there may be a game explanation screen for explaining the contents of the game and effects, and a maker display screen for displaying the logo of the maker of the gaming machine 10 .

(G 1) screen at the time of stop is the stage after the stop display time (set in the special game processing timer) in which the decoration stop pattern (F) is displayed as "3, 7, 8". Here, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3212), a customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A3213, B1307), and the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting screen, but here (f) , the stop screen appears unchanged. The appearance may be changed by deleting the mode display 679 and the change count display 677 from (f). On the screen at the time of stop, the decorative stop pattern is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed in a small size so as not to interfere with the decorative stop pattern.

Next, the player setting screen (G2) is displayed after the stop screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds). On the player setting screen, a volume adjustment image 527 that is a meter image for volume adjustment and a brightness adjustment image 528 (light amount adjustment image) that is a meter image for brightness adjustment (light amount adjustment) are displayed. By the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), the volume of the speaker 19 is adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, the meter in the volume adjustment image 527 rises or falls, and the cross key switch 450 The brightness of the performance LED is adjusted according to the operation of , and the meter in the brightness adjustment image 528 rises or falls.

In the player setting screen of (G 2), the volume adjustment image 527 and the brightness adjustment image 528 are the front side layer (foremost layer) than the decorative stop symbol and the operation notice display 511, and the variable display area 610 and / or It may be displayed superimposed on the decoration stop pattern of the variable display area 615 or the operation notice display 511 .

Next, on the customer waiting demo movie screen of (g3), a customer waiting demo movie 535 is displayed in which shooting stars are flowing. Here, other displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535 (decorative stop pattern, special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650, special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, first predetermined image 675, second predetermined image 676, mode display 679, change count display 677, etc.) are erased and hidden. As a result, the operation notice display 511 does not interfere with displays other than the customer waiting demo movie 535, so that it is displayed so as to be enlarged more than the stop screen of (G1) and the player setting screen of (G2). Aspects are changed.

Next, on the model name display screen of (g4), the model name of the gaming machine 10 (for example, the model (official name) “P Tiger Tiger Tiger”) is displayed as the model name display 519 . Furthermore, on the model name display screen, the fact that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function) may be displayed, for example, by a specific model display 541 consisting of characters indicating "equipped with a complete function". . A player who sees the specific model display 541 as the complete function installation display can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function). The activation notice display 511 may be displayed in a layer (foremost layer) on the front side of the model name display 519 and the specific model display 541 so as to be superimposed on them. The specific model display 541 may also be displayed on the customer waiting demo movie screen (G3).

Next, on the (g5) attention calling display screen, an attention calling display 543 for warning the player that he or she is absorbed in the game is displayed together with the operation notice display 511 and the specific model display 541 . In (G 5), the warning display 543 and the activation notice display 511 do not overlap, but if they overlap, either the caution display 543 or the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in the front layer (foremost layer). .

After that, the customer waiting screen is switched (shifted) again to (G1) the stop time screen, (G2) the player setting screen, and (G3) the customer waiting demo movie screen in order.

As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 during customer waiting is the display state of images other than the operation notice display 511, that is, the types of customer waiting screens that can be cyclically switched (stop screen, player setting screen , Customer Waiting Demo Movie Screen, Model Name Display Screen, Alert Display Screen). Furthermore, while waiting for a customer, the specific model display 541 may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function).

[Example of screen during setting confirmation]
FIG. 105 illustrates the display screen of the display device 41 in the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) regarding the fourth embodiment.

(A) is a display screen that is first displayed in the setting confirmation state, and the effect control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 545 that informs that the setting is being confirmed as a character display "setting confirmation". It is displayed on the display screen (B1328). In addition, the effect control device 300 displays on the display screen a character display “setting history list” and an operation prompting image 546 imitating the operation unit (here, the effect button 25). The operation-promoting image 546 prompts the player to operate the operation unit, and may be modeled after the cross key switch 450 .

(B) is a display screen that is displayed after switching from (A) when the operation unit (in this case, the effect button 25) is operated, and a setting history list 548 is displayed. In the setting history list 548, the presence or absence of setting changes and setting confirmations are displayed in order from the past to the present, and the probability setting value at the time of setting change or setting confirmation and the duration of the changed probability setting value are displayed. there is An operation prompting image 546 is displayed to prompt the user to return to the screen of (A) by performing a predetermined operation (pressing operation) on the operation unit (production button 25). In addition, an operation prompting image 547 is also displayed to prompt the user to scroll the setting history list 548 and see the past history by performing another predetermined operation (swipe operation) on the operation unit (production button 25). Note that the operation prompting image 546 and the operation prompting image 547 here may simulate the cross key switch 450 .

Furthermore, in the setting history list 548, a predetermined mark (* in this case) is displayed on the same line in association with the probability setting value so that the probability setting value when the safety device is activated and the operation is stopped can be recognized. It is As a result, hall officials can set a high probability setting value (for example, 5, 6) that increases the probability of winning such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, and a large number of balls (large number of safe balls) will be released as intended. It can be confirmed whether or not the safety device has been activated (stopped). Then, the result of confirmation can be utilized for changing the probability set value in the future.

[Example 1 of specific model display]
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example (example 1) of the specific model display 541 (complete function installed display) displayed in a form other than video in relation to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 106, a specific model display 541 is displayed by printing, printing, painting, or the like. Note that in FIG. 104, the specific model display 541 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 as an image.

FIG. 106 shows the collective display device 50 provided on the game board 30 and its surroundings. Specifications of the game machine 10 are displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50. FIG. As a specification display, the probability of a big hit at low probability at setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting) is displayed 85a "1/300 and 1/200", the number of prize balls is displayed 85b "3 & 2 & 10 & 14", the upper limit of the number of rounds Value display 85c "3, 6, 9", model (official name) display 85d "Pxxxx", and in the case of a model with a variable probability state, display 85e of the presence or absence of a limit related to the variable probability jackpot (here, "Limit None”) is displayed.

In the display 85b of the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls of the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39 can be recognized in order, for example, 3, 2, 10, 14. Is displayed. The limit on the probability variable jackpot means that the number of consecutive probability variable jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number of times (a predetermined limit number of times (number of consecutive games) jackpots can be generated Become).

In FIG. 106, a specific model display 541 indicates that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function), for example, by printed, printed or painted characters such as "Complete function installed". Fixed and always displayed. The specific model display 541 is always displayed even when the power of the gaming machine 10 is cut off, and is always displayed without being displayed as an image on a specific screen as shown in FIG. Therefore, the specific model display 541 is easily recognized by the player at all times, and thus is more convenient for the player than the specific model display 541 displayed as a video. The specific model display 541 is displayed in series with the display 85d of the model (official name) of the gaming machine 10, or displayed in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 in order to give the impression that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device. etc. may be displayed in association with the display 85d.

Note that the specific model display 541 by printing, printing, painting, or the like in FIG. 106 is the same character string “complete function installed” (same display content) as the specific model display 541 by video in FIG. , a different character string (different display content) may be used. If the character string of the specific model display 541 in FIG. 106 is partially omitted and shortened to, for example, "Complete function", the periphery of the batch display device 50 with little free space can be effectively used.

[Example 2 of specific model display]
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example (example 2) of the specific model display 541 (complete function equipped display) displayed in a form other than video in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 107 as well, the specific model display 541 is displayed by printing, printing, painting, or the like.

In FIG. 107, the specific model display 541 is displayed on the substantially flat front portion 456 of the decoration device 18a (top unit). The decoration device 18a protrudes obliquely upward and forward from the upper portion of the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame). On the front surface portion 456, a model name display 456a indicating the model name (here, "Tiger Tiger Tiger") is provided by printing, printing, painting, or the like. The model name display 456a may differ from the model name display 519 displayed as an image on the display screen in terms of display mode and display content. you can Also, on the front part 456, a character 456b that is related to the model name and that can also appear on the display screen of the display device 41 is provided by printing, painting, or the like.

The specific model display 541 is provided by printing, printing, painting, or the like near the end of the front face portion 456, for example, at a position adjacent to or facing the character 456b.

The front part 456 may be permanently fixed to the decoration device 18a, or may be detachable from the decoration device 18a for convenience and replaceable according to the model. A sheet or film on which the model name display 456a, the character 456b, and the specific model display 541 are fixedly displayed by printing or the like can be inserted into the front portion 456. It may be something that can be visually recognized through. The sheet and film can be replaced according to the model, which is convenient.

[Other configuration examples]
In order to simplify the control of the effect control device 300, unlike FIG. 102, the operation notice display 511a-511d ("I will stop soon") is the same between the normal game state, the time saving state, the variable probability state, and the special game state. Display mode may be used (same size and same font). Also, unlike FIG. 103, the activation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the variable display, and unlike FIG.

The notice start value (190000 in the above description) at which the safety device activation notice state starts, that is, the timing for starting the display of the actuation notice display 511 may be changed. For example, in a game state in which a big hit is likely to occur, the operation notice display 511 may be started to be displayed at a smaller notice start value than in the normal game state in the general electric support state (probability variable state, time saving state) so that the notice can be given at an early timing. .

A switch for turning on and off the safety device (complete function) by the operation of a hall official is provided on the back side of the game machine 10, and only when this switch connected to the game control device 100 is turned on, the game control device 100 operates the safety device. Let it work.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is capable of executing a game, and is capable of generating a game disabled state (game stop state, game prohibited state) in which a game cannot be executed by establishment of a predetermined condition (operating condition). Stop means (for example, a safety device) and notification means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the display device 41, etc.) capable of reporting an error related to the payout of game media in a game disabled state are provided.

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the game from being played when a predetermined condition such as the number of difference balls or the number of safe balls is large, so that appropriate countermeasures against fraud can be taken. By suppressing it, it may be possible to suppress the player's addiction to the game. If the immersion is suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, an error can be reported even in a game disabled state in which a game cannot be executed, and appropriate fraud countermeasures can be taken while preventing disadvantages or inconveniences from occurring to players, hall personnel, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and when a predetermined condition (operating condition) is met, the gaming machine 10 changes to a game-disabled state (game-stopped state, game-prohibited state) where the game cannot be executed. Possible game stopping means (for example, a safety device), and a display control means (for example, an effect and a control device 300). The display control means changes the display mode of the notice display according to the game state (for example, during customer waiting, during variable display).

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the game from being played when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the number of difference balls or the number of safe balls is large. It is possible. A notice display (for example, an operation notice display 511) notifies the player of the possibility of being unable to play in advance, urges the player to finish the game, and prevents the player from unintentionally receiving a disadvantage. can. In addition, it is possible to give a surprise to a person who is committing fraud by the notice display, and encourage him or her to stop the fraud. Further, the display mode of the notice display can be changed according to the game state (for example, waiting for a customer, during variable display), so that the notice display can be performed effectively.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a payout control means (for example, payout control device 200) capable of paying out game media, and game media paid out during a predetermined period (for example, a period from power-on to the present). A first counting means (for example, Difference ball confirmation processing of the game control device 100). In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a second counting means (for example, the difference ball confirmation process of the game control device 100) capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). and an out-ball detection switch 74). Furthermore, the game machine 10 has a calculation means (for example, the difference ball confirmation process of the game control device 100) capable of calculating a calculation value (for example, a safety device counter value or a difference ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses. Prepare. When the calculated value reaches a reference value (for example, a counter reference value, a difference ball reference value), the game stopping means (for example, a safety device) can generate a non-playable state assuming that a predetermined condition (operating condition) is established. The display control means (for example, the performance control device 300) can display a predetermined display (for example, an operating display 513) indicating that the game is in a non-playable state on the display means.

In such a gaming machine 10, a non-playable state can be generated based on a calculated value based on the number of game media paid out and the number of used game media (for example, the number of shot balls or the number of discharged balls). Since it is possible to display a predetermined display (for example, the active display 513) indicating the state, fraud countermeasures can be effectively implemented, and the player's immersion in the game can be effectively suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the calculated value (for example, the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls) becomes a predetermined value (announcement start value) smaller than the reference value, the display control means An indication (for example, activation notice indication 511) can be displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify in advance that the game will be in a non-playable state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the calculated value (for example, the safety device counter value or the difference ball number) reaches the reference value but the predetermined condition (operating condition) is not satisfied, the display control means (for example Effect control device 300) can display on the display means a display (for example, operation warning display 512) different from the predetermined display (for example, during operation display 513) and the advance notice display (for example, operation notice display 511). Therefore, it is possible to warn the player of the disadvantage by informing the player in advance that the game will be stopped after a predetermined condition is established (for example, after the end of a small win or a big win).

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the display control means (for example, the performance control device 300) changes the display mode of the advance notice display (for example, the operation notice display 511) for notifying that the game will be disabled. can be different depending on As a result, the notice display can be appropriately displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41) in accordance with the progress of the game. Also, the display mode of the advance notice display can be changed in accordance with the progress of the game so as not to interfere with the presentation on the display means, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes adjusting means (for example, the effect control device 300) capable of adjusting the gaming machine 10 (for example, brightness adjustment and volume adjustment) according to the operation of the player. . The adjusting means does not perform the adjustment even when there is an operation by the player in the game disabled state. Therefore, even if there is an operation by the player or the like in the game stop state, since various adjustments such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment are not executed, the player and the like can easily recognize that the game is in the stop state. Since the player cannot freely adjust the game machine 10, there is a possibility that power can be saved in the game stop state.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling effects related to the game. . The game control means controls the number of game media (game balls) paid out in a predetermined period (for example, the period from power-on to the present) or the number of game media determined to be paid out in a predetermined period. a first counting means capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of safe balls); A game stopping means (for example, a safety device) capable of generating a game impossible state in which the game cannot be executed based on the difference between the number and the number of used balls (for example, the number of difference balls). The game control means includes a start memory means capable of storing a start memory as a game execution right, and a preliminary determination means capable of determining the result of the game in advance before the game based on the start memory is executed. On-hold information determination processing). Production control means (production control device 300), when receiving the determination result of the prior determination means from the game control means (for example, the information included in the look-ahead stop symbol command and look-ahead variation pattern command), notice based on the determination result Effect (for example, look-ahead effect, look-ahead notice effect) can be executed, and if the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is a predetermined value (for example, 94500) or more, the notice effect is not executed even if the judgment result is received. . As a result, when the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses reaches a predetermined value close to the occurrence of the game-disabled state, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting unnecessarily. Discomfort can be reduced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) executes the game based on the starting memory regardless of the difference between the number of payouts and the number of used balls (for example, the number of difference balls). , the result of the game is determined in advance, and the determination result (for example, information included in the prefetching stop symbol command and the prefetching variation pattern command) can be transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300). The effect control means, when receiving the determination result from the game control means, can execute the notice effect (for example, look-ahead effect, look-ahead notice effect) based on the determination result. As a result, regardless of the difference between the number of payouts and the number of use (for example, the number of difference balls), the notice effect (for example, the prefetch effect, the prefetch notice effect) can be executed, so the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is the game disabled state Even when reaching a predetermined value (for example, 94500) that will occur soon, the advance notice effect can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling effects related to games. The game machine 10 includes a movable member (movable accessory) that can operate as a performance, and a game stopping means that can generate a game disabled state (game stopped state, game prohibited state) in which a game cannot be executed by establishment of a predetermined condition. (e.g. a safety device); The performance control means returns the movable member from the operating position to the initial position if the movable member is located at an operating position other than the initial position after the game is disabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being maintained at the operating position in the game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstanding such as that the movable member is out of order.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control means moves the movable member to the operating position when the movable member is positioned at an operating position other than the initial position after the game is disabled. to the initial position. In this case, the movable member remains in an unnatural position, and the game cannot be played (game stopped state, game prohibited state), so the gaming machine 10 is in a normal state (the game cannot be played). It can be emphasized to the player that it is not possible to play.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the first condition (for example, condition (1): the difference ball number reaches the difference ball reference value of 95000) and the second condition (for example, condition (2): It is provided with a game stop means capable of generating a game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed by establishment of a win or not. The effect control means can display on the display means a first display (for example, an operation notice display 511) for notifying that the game will be disabled before the first condition is satisfied. When the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, the effect control means displays the second display (for example, the operation warning display 512) at least partially in common with the first display. It can be displayed on the device 41). This gives the impression that both the first display (for example, the operation notice display 511) and the second display (for example, the operation warning display 512) are displays related to the operation of the game stopping means and the occurrence of the game impossible state. In addition, it is possible to prevent misidentification with other types of indications other than safety device-related indications.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is also possible to replace the time saving state with a probability variable state. For example, the production control device can also execute a part of the processing that the game control device is executing, and conversely, the game control device can also execute a part of the processing that the production control device is executing. . For example, various combinations of multiple embodiments and multiple modifications are possible. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals to be paid out. The number of game media used is the number of inserted medals, which is the number of inserted medals inserted into the slot machine. In slot machines, the ball payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the accessory ratio is the number of medals paid out during a predetermined period. Among them, the ratio (%) of the number paid out by various bonuses.

10 game machine 25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 34 normal figure start gate 36 first start winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific Area (V Winning Gate)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)
511 Operation notice display 512 Operation warning display 513 Operation display 520 Ball out error display 522 Overflow error display 524 Two-dimensional code 541 Specific model display (complete function equipped display)

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with effect control means capable of controlling game-related effects, the number of game values given to the player or the number of game values determined to be given to the player , a second counting means capable of counting the number of used game values , which is the number of game values used in a game , and the number of given game values and the number of used game values a game stop means capable of generating a game disabled state in which a game cannot be executed based on the number, and the effect control means controls the value based on the given game value number and the used game value number to be within a predetermined range. In some cases, an indication of the value can be displayed on the display means.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means capable of controlling an effect related to a game,
a first counting means capable of counting the number of game media paid out in a predetermined period or the number of game media determined to be paid out in a predetermined period;
a second counting means capable of counting the number of use, which is the number of game media used in the predetermined period;
a game stopping means capable of generating a game disabled state in which the game cannot be executed based on the payout number and the use number;
The production control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when a value corresponding to the difference between the number of payouts and the number of uses is within a predetermined range, the value can be displayed on display means.

Images